JP6508738B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  A lottery process is performed based on the fact that the game ball driven into the game area is accepted by the starting opening, and when the result of the lottery process is a big hit, an image indicating a big hit is displayed, for example, on the effect display device A gaming machine in which a big hit game is played is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, many display effects are displayed on the effect display device so as to boost the player's expectations in order to increase the expectation for the big hit, but such effects are boosted on the effect display device Even if such display effects are performed, there is a limit to enliven the player's expectations. Therefore, for example, a movable member for effect is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device, and the moveable member is advanced to the front of the effect display device to enhance the sense of expectation of becoming a big hit .

  However, as described above, many movable members provided in the vicinity of the effect display device are moved up and down toward the effect display device, and there is little interest when simply moved up and down. Therefore, a gaming machine is known in which a movable effect device is provided in which the movable member is made to perform an interesting movement to make it more interesting (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-275235 A

By the way, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for a new winning opening unit provided in the gaming area, which is a new one for suppressing the decrease in the amusement of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above-described circumstances, the present invention has an object of providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a gaming board on which a gaming ball can flow down on the front side, and a ball entry unit provided on the gaming board and having a winning opening on which the gaming ball can pitch.
The winning opening is opened and closed by an open / close member that switches between an open state and a closed state,
A cover unit is provided on the front side of the ball entry unit to form a game area as a back area,
A distribution guide means for guiding the distribution of the gaming balls is provided on the side of the cover surface of the cover unit separately from the opening and closing member ,
The distribution guide means includes a branch portion provided as a non-movable fixed member for branching the flow path of the game ball and having a slant surface for rolling the game ball toward the winning opening, and the branch portion The game ball is branched into a first flow path that can be distributed to the winning opening and a second flow path that is not distributed to the winning opening ,
No game nail is provided on the surface side of the cover portion , and the cover portion and the distribution guide means are in contact with the game balls to guide the distribution of the game balls,
The branching unit is provided on the upstream side of the branching unit, and branches the gaming ball which has flowed down the ball flow passage having a width in which only one game ball can flow down to the first flow passage or the second flow passage. A game machine characterized by being capable of .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was looked after. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle device in a door frame, and was looked after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feed unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen after removing the back case of a ball | bowl feed unit. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution passage of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen after. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc. disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 later. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main part frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board shown intelligibly and showing a 2nd attacking unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonal back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the rear. It is a perspective view of an attacker unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back bottom. (A) It is a front view of an attacker unit, (b) is a BB sectional view in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the projection area | region by the projector unit of an attacker unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable presentation unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable presentation unit, and was seen after. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the front left movable effect unit. It is a front view of a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at center goods from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a center character later. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center thing by each main structure, and was seen after. It is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacker unit in center goods. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the 2nd attacker unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable presentation unit in center goods, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable presentation unit in center goods, and was seen after. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the front right movable effect unit in the center role. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit into every main component, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into main component members, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a front view of a back inside movable presentation unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable effect unit from the front in the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable effect unit back from inside. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable production | presentation unit in the back in every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable presentation unit back to main parts, and was looked after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in a back inside movable presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a back inside drive mechanism in a back inside movable presentation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism in the back in every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism in the back in every main member, and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect unit during the back. It is a front view of the back-up back movable presentation unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up and back movable presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at back movable back production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up and back movable presentation unit into an arm slide unit and an arm unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up and back movable presentation unit into an arm slide unit and an arm unit, and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm slide unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm slide unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and looked at it back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit, and was looked after. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm slide unit in a back up movable presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm unit in a back up movable presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up front movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back up front movable presentation unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up front movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up front movable presentation unit, and was seen after. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back up front movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the back up front movable production unit and the back up back movable production unit in the back unit. Fig. 174 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a back-to-front and front-side movable effect unit and a back-to-back back-side movable effect unit, which is subsequent to Fig. 174; It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom back movable presentation unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at back movable back production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom back movable presentation unit into a back back back decoration unit, a raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom back movable presentation unit into a back bottom back decoration unit, a raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back bottom back decoration unit of a back bottom back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back decoration unit and was looked after. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back bottom back decoration unit. It is a perspective view which shows schematic structure of the raising / lowering unit in a back bottom back movable presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back and forth back movable presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back down front movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a back lower front movable presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom front movable presentation unit, and was seen after. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back lower front movable effect unit. It is a perspective view which shows the back left movable presentation unit 3700 in a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back left movable presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back left movable presentation unit and was seen after. It is an explanatory view showing movement of one movable unit in back left movable production unit. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back left movable effect unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production | presentation prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a prior determination table used for the effect prior determination process, and (B) is a table about the type details of prefetching determined by the prior determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a big hit determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of big hit Symbol determination table used for It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 ms regular processing performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of melody reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of melody reach. It is a time chart which shows the modification of melody reach. It is a figure which shows the normal state before a specific movable presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the progress which moves an arm unit through the front of a liquid crystal display device to a waiting | standby position as a front step of specific movable presentation. It is a figure which shows the state which the arm unit moves to the standby position from the accommodation position, and is hold | maintained at the standby position. It is a figure which shows the aspect of specific movable presentation.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is struck, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It has the door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A tray-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 5 are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 where the game ball is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and it projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. A hand or the like is inserted, and it is possible not to touch the game ball or the obstacle nail in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger hold, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13, and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging down from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to be narrower than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it is separated from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be increased. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame It is a disassembled perspective view.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer circumference, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the top outer circumference of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 And a pair of side speaker covers 290 which are disposed and attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base body 110, an upper bracket 120 mounted at the upper center of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base body 110 for fixing an upper decoration unit, and a lower edge of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 disposed on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110, and the front face of the door frame base main body 110 attached to the lower right corner in front view And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  Note that the door frame base unit 100 is outside the side speaker 130 on the right side in a front view, with the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 etc. And a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24 and the like). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and hold the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when attaching or removing the side speaker 130. It is possible to

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 And a wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of the wiring cord 196 connecting the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wiring cord 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. The details are described later, but are held by the wire holding member 197 and extended backward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board are described later. It is connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a notch portion of the rectangular shape 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the fal cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivotally supported side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are sent to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window, and the glass unit locking member 190 which protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 to which the side speaker 130 is attached, and an attachment hole 110h for attaching the side speaker cover 290 (FIGS. 25 etc.) are respectively formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right glass units 590 are arranged to penetrate through the glass unit support stepped portion 110a into which the glass unit 590 is fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the door frame 110 (the door frame 5), it can be detached by a predetermined screw via the mounting hole 110h. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the crime prevention cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must first be removed from the door frame base main body 110. Thus, taking some time to remove the side speaker cover 290 can make the person who intends to conduct a fraud etc. take time and effort for the removal work, and removes the relatively large glass unit 590. As a result, the removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (security) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by making the theft behavior against the side speaker 130, fraud inside the gaming area 1100, etc. It has become.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the front upper portion of the door frame base main body 110, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100. While concealing the upper clearance formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240, the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Also, the upper bracket 120 is configured such that a part of its tip is inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and can support the upper decoration unit 280 from the upper side when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is supposed to be.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 27 to FIG. 29 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding is formed in the holding holes 197a which are paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 It is pushed forward by the part, and it will rotate in the direction which approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend is large (sharp) near the end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being blocked by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main frame 3 is pivotally supported on the rear surface and held so that a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction. When opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching or the like.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force is applied through the wire cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the wiring cord 196, and to securely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a failure.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit Each decoration board 214 as electric equipment 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. The door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high security against fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction, and the rear end of the tubular portion 141 A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 27 and 28, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 mounted along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 27) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 106). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 106) can prevent the insertion of the tool, and can prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, and can enhance the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 mounted at the lower right in rear view, and the rear surface is flat. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2 B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 is provided for the side decoration frame 202 forming the skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, the side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and the side upper decoration member 204. Side upper decorative member 204 is attached on the front side so as to cover the upper side of the side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204, and sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206 A side upper cover 208, a side lens 210 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed from the rear side to the side frame 202, and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back of the side lens 210 And.

  In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) A substrate 214, and a lower-side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 212 in the vertical direction from the lower side and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LEDs) and A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the back side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216 The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Furthermore, the right side decoration unit 200 supports the upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left in the front view of the side decoration frame 202 and the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted at the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202 A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202, and a side sub lens 228 attached from the inside at a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208; There is. On the rear side of the side sub lens 228, the LED 214c of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side is disposed, and light emission decoration is performed by the LED 214 c.

  In this right side decoration unit 200, the side decoration frame 202, the side upper decoration member 204, the right side upper decoration substrate cover 218, and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 are formed of opaque members, and the side decoration Plated layers of predetermined colors are formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decoration unit 200 are translucent members. The substantially upper side cover 208 is milky white, and the upper side decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is assumed.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 and the front side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedron shape. It is designed to be able to diffuse and refract light. Therefore, the upper right side decoration substrate 214 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, etc. mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower right side decoration substrate 216 It can not be clearly seen from the In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is generally formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101 as shown, specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101 The arc-shaped inner frame 202a and the upper part are arranged at positions separated outward with respect to the inner frame 202a, and are straight along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part The outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame An inner frame 2 is disposed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of a lower end frame 202d that connects lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a. Both ends of the are formed in an arc shape projecting forward. In addition, a curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the portion of the outer frame 202b that extends vertically in a straight line is formed in a curved arc shape also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. The partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation radially extended from near the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition walls 202f. The light emission decorative opening 202g is formed as the light emission decorative opening 202g, and a circumferential lens portion 210a of a side lens 210 described later is fitted from the rear side. The radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Furthermore, the slit 202e and the light emitting decorative opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, so that the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  The side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200, as shown in the figure, extends in the left and right direction substantially along the arc-like upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and A plurality of openings 204 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arrayed openings 204a.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 is shaped to fit in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 through the opening 204a to near its front end A plurality of light guides 206a that can protrude can be provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedron at its tip, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it may appear as if a jewel is fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. In addition, the light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guiding portion 206 a of the side upper decoration lens 204 may be emitted forward (to the player side) from the opening 204 a of the side upper decoration member 204. As well as being able to, the tip of the light guide 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The upper surface and the right side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 is shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100) and the lower surface (lower end) Is shaped substantially along the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper cover 208 is formed with an attachment step 208a which is open at the lower side and is recessed rearward so as to be able to accommodate the side upper decoration member 204 at the lower part of the front surface. On the end face, a mounting boss, a mounting hole and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed. Also, on the right side of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged up and down are formed, so that the side sub lens 228 attached inside through the notches 208b looks to the surface side It has become. By fitting the side sub lens 228 into the cutout portion 208 b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light in a different manner only at this portion.

  The side lenses 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 are shaped substantially along the side decoration frame 202, and the rear face is recessed, and are inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202. A circumferential lens portion 210 a and a radiation lens portion 210 b to be inserted later into the slit 202 e of the side decoration frame 202 are provided. As illustrated, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emission decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodated accommodating step part 210c. An upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step portion 210c. In addition, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210d which forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208a of the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape which bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the circumferential lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b substantially follow the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is uneven. By this, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, due to the polyhedral inner surface, the peripheral lens portion 210a can be made to have a distinctive characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed, as illustrated. The main body portion 212a is formed in such a manner that the rear surface is recessed, and it continues from the rear end of the main body portion 212a and protrudes forward beyond the main body portion 212a and corresponds to the radiation lens portion 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) And a plate-like light guide portion 212b disposed at the same position. The main body portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state in which the front surface thereof is spaced from the inner surface of the side lens 210 by a predetermined distance. Also, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the same manner as the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is polyhedral by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions. Because the plate thickness of the main body portion 212a is not uniform, light transmitted through the main body portion 212a is irregularly refracted.

  By combining this side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, it is possible to irregularly refract light passing through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a, and it is possible It is almost impossible to recognize. Also, due to the irregular refraction and the irregular reflection due to the polyhedron shape, it is possible to make the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) glitter and to make the perspective feeling unclear and mysterious.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and the light emission decoration opening 202 g of the side decoration frame 202 (peripheral of the side lens 210 The LEDs 214a and 216a disposed at positions corresponding to the lens portions 210a) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 202e of the side decoration frame 202 (the side lenses 210) are used. The LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have relatively narrow illumination angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). The LED 214 c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 for emitting and decorating the side sub lens 228 is a red LED in this example.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by the upper speaker bracket 224 in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224 a that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. Then, the upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player by the horn portion 224a in front view It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is made to emit toward the player from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 by the horn section 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions, as with the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 and the main portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212. The light is transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 so as to be irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness.

  Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c in the side decoration frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226, so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces that face in different directions as the circumferential lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212. The light is transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 so as to be irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the through holes 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side by random refraction of light. The outer appearance of the side lens 210 is similar to that of the circumferential lens portion 210a.

[1-2 C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. FIG. 34 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in a circular arc shape along with the outer side is formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, it is formed substantially symmetrical with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 is provided for the side decoration frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. Side upper decorative member 244 is attached on the front side so as to cover the upper side of the side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244, and sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246 A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 for supporting the lower part of the side upper cover 248 and fitted and fixed from the rear side to the side frame 242, and a side inner lens 252 fitted to the back of the side lens 250; And.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 supports the upper left speaker 262 disposed at the upper right in the front view of the side decoration frame 242 and the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted at the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 242 A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, the side decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration member 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of opaque members, and the side decoration Plated layers of predetermined colors are formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decoration member 244. In addition, the upper side decorative lens 246, the upper side cover 248, the side lens 250, the inner side lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decoration unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially upper portion of the side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 and the front side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. It is designed to be able to diffuse and refract light. Therefore, the upper left side decoration substrate 254 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left side lower decoration substrate 256 It can not be clearly seen from the In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is generally formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101 as shown, specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101 An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper part arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a and extending along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part The outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper frame 242c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame An inner frame 2 is disposed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of a lower end frame 242 d that connects lower end edges of 242 a and the inner frame 242 a and the outer frame 242 b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  An inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed linearly at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a Both ends of the are formed in an arc shape projecting forward. The curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end side protrudes forward. The partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242 f is disposed on radiation radially extended from near the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition frames 242f. The light emission decorative opening 242g is formed as the light emission decorative opening 242g, and a circumferential lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Furthermore, the slit 242e and the light emitting decorative opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, so that the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  The side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends laterally at a constant height substantially along the arc-like upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242, as shown in the figure, and And a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 is provided with a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the arrayed openings 244a.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to near its front end A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude can be provided. The light guide portion 246a has a polyhedral shape at its tip, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it may appear that a jewel is fitted into the opening 244a. It can be done. In addition, light from the left side upper decoration substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guiding portion 246a of the side upper decoration lens 244 may be emitted forward (to the player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decoration member 244. As well as being able to, the tip of the light guiding portion 246a can be made to shine as a gem.

  The upper surface and left side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 is shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and the lower surface (lower end) Is shaped substantially along the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is formed at the lower part of the front surface so as to be able to accommodate the side upper decorative member 244, and has an open lower portion and a backward recessed installation step 248a. On the end face, a mounting boss, a mounting hole and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248 b covering the upper pivot support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 on the outer side surface (left side surface in front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 is shaped substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a concave rear surface, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 242 g of the side decoration frame 242 A circumferential lens portion 250 a and a radiation lens portion 250 b to be inserted later into the slit 242 e of the side decoration frame 242 are provided. As illustrated, the side lens 250 does not include the circumferential lens portion 250 a corresponding to the light emitting decorative opening 242 g in contact with the upper end frame 242 c of the side decorative frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is set as the stored accommodating step part 250c. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step 250c. Further, the side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250 d which forms the upper surface of the accommodation step 250 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step 248 a of the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape bulging forward such that the front surfaces of the circumferential lens portion 250 a and the radiation lens portion 250 b substantially follow the front end of the partition frame 242 f of the side decoration frame 242. Further, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is uneven Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, due to the polyhedral inner surface, the peripheral lens portion 250a can be made to have a distinctive characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted into and fitted to the inside of the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 on which the peripheral lens portion 250 a and the radiation lens portion 250 b are formed, as shown in the drawing. The main body portion 252a is formed in such a manner that the rear surface is recessed, and it continues from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward beyond the main body portion 252a and corresponds to the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242) And a plate-like light guide 252b disposed at the same position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed in a state in which the front surface thereof is spaced from the inner surface of the side lens 250 by a predetermined distance. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250, one surface of the main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is polyhedral by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted because the thickness of the main body 252a is not uniform.

  By combining this side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be irregularly refracted in a double manner, and the shape etc. of the object disposed on the opposite side It is almost impossible to recognize. Also, due to the irregular refraction and the irregular reflection due to the polyhedron shape, it is possible to make the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) glitter and to make the perspective feeling unclear and mysterious.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240, and the light emission decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 (peripheral of the side lens 250 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 242e of the side decoration frame 242 (the side lenses 250) are used. The LEDs 254b and 256b disposed at the positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have relatively narrow illumination angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264 a that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper left speaker 262 can not be seen from the player by the horn portion 264a in a front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the top of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn section 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions, as with the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252. The light is transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to be irregularly refracted as the plate thickness becomes uneven.

  Further, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c in the side decoration frame 242 The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces that face in different directions as the circumferential lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the main portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 The light is transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 so as to be irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness. Accordingly, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the through holes 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side The outer appearance of the side lens 250 can be made similar to that of the circumferential lens portion 250 a.

[1-2 D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a which largely penetrates to the center and both left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side inside the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 The outer shape of the front view is the center lens 282 fitted from the inside, the inner lens 283 disposed at the rear end of the center lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 The central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 have a shape similar to that of the front decorative member 281. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to be held by the decorative member 281, and an upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285 and having a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface And a substrate cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so as to cover the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends backward while bending from the lower end of the front decorative member 281 so that the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 inserted from the upper side into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287 And. In the present example, a plated layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front surface decorative member 281 and the lower surface decorative member 288. The LED 286 a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286 b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, in this example, the LED 286a is a full color LED, and the LED 286b is a high brightness white LED.

  The inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example is an arc whose center upper end is a side extending in the left and right direction in a front view It has three projections which extend from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end apex into the central opening 281a. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending diagonally upward and outward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281 a, whereby the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281 a The wing is formed in an extended shape, and a side opening 281b is formed along the cross-cut.

  The central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward and the front surface Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of faces directed in different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel cut like a brilliant cut and the front decorative member 281 looks like a pedestal of the jewelry .

  Further, the inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a minute lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused to the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted in the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decorative member 281 It is done. A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284 as in the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It is possible to emit light.

  The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of cloudiness due to a plurality of fine lenses and the like formed on the surface, and the rear side can not be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction with an outline substantially along the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is closed with the front end opening inclined obliquely downward The central portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and the rear ends disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a and closed are substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 through the rear end faces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b. ing. When the upper decorative substrate 286 is disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LEDs 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 are inserted into the opening 285c, and light from the LEDs 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. The central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  Further, the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side shapes thereof are the upper speaker cover 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240, The shape is substantially the same as the shape of the end on the side closer to the upper end frame 202c or 242c of 266, and the end on the side closer to the upper end frame 202c or 242c of the upper speaker cover 226 or 266 is placed and fixed ing. The lower lens 289 is held between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker cover 226, 266. In addition, light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the left side upper decoration substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 through the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2 E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the pan unit 300 Are placed between the

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a disk-shaped cover body 291 having a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A body member 292 formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having an annular opening, and a lower tray of the pan unit 300 disposed on the lower side of the body member 292 And a lower member 293 formed to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected.

  The side speaker cover 290 has a metallic gloss plating layer formed on the surface of the main body member 292. Further, the lower member 293 is formed of a milky white light transmitting member similar to the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 in this example is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300, and the door frame base main body It is fixed to the door frame base main body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through an attachment hole 110 h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position of 110.

  Thereby, after the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 is removed, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screw attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5 By removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 can be removed. Therefore, even if it becomes necessary to replace the side speaker 130 for some reason, the front surface of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the plate unit 300, etc. It is possible to easily remove only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker 130 so that the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, to replace the side speaker 130 mounted between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the pan unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door closing the front of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the attachment of the main body member 292 to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side of the door frame 5, the main body member 292 and the cover body 291 are made of the door frame base main body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 comes to be viewed from the front side of the door frame 5. Since this side speaker 130 is held by the speaker bracket 132 attached from the front side to the door frame base main body 110, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after removing the main body member 292 By removing the attachment of the bracket 132, releasing the sandwiching of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110) The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without removing it from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even if the player or the like knocks the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is broken, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily made. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the replacement of the side speaker 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged and the player becomes frustrated or lose interest, thereby reducing interest. It is possible to suppress it.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is held between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be mounted on the door frame 5 (even if there is no mounting piece or mounting hole for attaching the side speaker 130). Since it can be attached to the door frame base main body 110), there is no need to provide the side speaker 130 with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 covering the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, and the side speaker 130 can be sufficiently protected to suppress occurrence of a defect, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  In addition, since the side speaker cover 290 covering the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 should be relatively close to the player. As a result, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is disposed as close to the player as possible, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be more efficiently heard by the player, providing a powerful sound. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, since the side speakers 130 are disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, continuity of the decoration by the side decoration units 200, 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit The pachinko machine 1 can be connected between the tray 200 and the tray unit 300 without a sense of incongruity, and the side speaker cover 290 prevents the appearance from being deteriorated and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shape of the side decoration unit 200, 240 or the pan unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed of the side decoration unit 200, 240. This makes it possible to make the player feel as one with the tray unit 300. Even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200 and 240, etc., it is possible to make the player less uncomfortable. The designability of the front of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame Can take some time for removal of the unit, and can take time and effort for the removal operation to those who intend to perform an illegal act etc. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 high in deterrence (security) against fraudulent acts etc. by making theft acts and fraudulent acts insult.

[1-2 F. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 A ball can be supplied to a ball striking device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward when viewed visually, and a plurality of openings 316 a attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating vertically. There is a dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guiding portions 318a disposed between the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314 and fitted into the openings 316a of the upper dish front decoration member 316. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and the upper dish upper lens 318 are disposed on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a, 322a on the upper surface Is disposed between the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and upper dish left decorative substrate 322, and the upper dish upper lens 318 and the upper dish upper panel 314, from the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 And an upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of microprisms for diffusing the light of the light source to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  In the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A lower dish having a plate-like lower dish top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower dish top plate 326 and the lower dish main body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 330, a plate side middle cover 330 having openings 330a disposed on the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrating in the front and rear direction, and an opening 330a of the plate side middle cover 330 And a disk side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the disk side middle cover 330 and extending in the left and right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. A lock hole 330b is formed at the right end of the plate side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side in a front view, in which a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the plate side outer cover 334 on the right side in a front view.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish main body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; A lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the gaming balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower disc 302, and attached to the upper left side in a front view of the disc unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, see FIG. 171).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing gaming balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing gaming balls by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g, and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 remaining on the front side of the lower ball supply port 310g, thereby preventing more balls A ball can be fed into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The gaming balls, which are formed to be respectively positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, are supplied to the upper disc main body 312 (the upper disc 301) from the upper disc ball supply port 310c and are guided to the upper disc ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 312a that can contact the game ball is attached from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom to the open side. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in the front end at a step shape which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312 and has a decorative attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316. An operation unit attachment portion 314 c is formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314 b at a position on the front side of the plate main body 312 and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the upper plate right panel 310 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 are positioned at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a. An opening and a notch that penetrate in the direction are formed, and an opening that allows passage of a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 is formed in the operation unit attachment portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 is curved in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper tray upper panel 314, and a plurality of openings 316a from the lower side to the light guide portion 318a of the upper tray upper lens 318. Is fitted to the decorative attachment portion 314 b of the upper tray upper panel 314 so that the upper tray upper lens 318 can be held between the upper tray upper panel 314 and the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of minute lenses (prisms) on the surface is disposed under the upper dish upper lens 318, and the upper dish right decoration substrate 320 and the upper dish left decoration substrate 322 are disposed. It is possible to sufficiently diffuse the light from the above to make the entire upper dish upper lens 318 emit and decorate substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guiding section 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a is the same. The light guide 318a is shaped so as to have an appearance like a pair of shape-cut gems being fitted into the opening 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316. .

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest. And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to be lower toward the front side and higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower counter top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower cover 328 has an outer shape in a front view bulging downward, and each side is formed in an inverted triangle shape of a circular arc, and is provided with an opening 328 a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a matches the shape formed by the lower plate body 324 and the front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a translucent milk-white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The pan side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outsides of the lower pan cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along the lower side of the lower pan cover 328 from the approximate center in the left and right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view The upper rear end extending to the side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The plate side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the plate side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Furthermore, a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction to a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 in the vicinity of the outer end (right end) of the right side (open side) When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 330 b.

  The plate side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower portion of the front end, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is supposed to be. In addition, a portion of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The plate side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right sides of the plate side middle cover 330 in a front view and has a substantially triangular shape along the side and the bottom of the door frame 5 and is open rearward and upward. It is shaped like a box. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) plate side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The bowl side outer cover 334 is attached to the front of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the bowl unit base 310. In addition, the lower side except the central portion of the lower plate main body 324 is covered by the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314a of the upper disc upper panel The actuating piece 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper disc ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the disc unit base 310; The upper disc ball-out slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the disc unit base 310 and the upper disc ball-out slider 343 can be slid in the vertical direction And an upper countersinking base 344 attached to the rear side of the support and the tray unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing channel 344c in which the game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. Thus, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper countersink base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b from the upper countersink outlet 310d. The ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and is transferred from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 etc. While being able to prevent breakage, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower disc ball draining mechanism 350 in the disc unit 300 has a lower disc ball out base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the disc side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower disc main body 324 in the front view right and left. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball withdrawal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower plate ball withdrawal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324; A lower countersink slider 353 slidably supported in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the ball remover base 351, and a lower countersink release button 354 attached to the front end of the lower countersink slider 353.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. In addition, the opening and closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a that can close the lower flat ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter round hole that is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower flat ball opening hole 324b. And the lower ball ball extraction base 351 and a coil spring bias the closing portion 352a to a position where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a are closed.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact with the lower flat ball slide slider 353, and this contact pin contacts the lower flat ball slide slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b are moved to move backward by the lower disk ball opening slider 353, or the lower disk opening slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. It is possible to

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower disc ball extraction button 354 is disposed at a position under the middle in the left-right direction of the lower disc cover 328 in the disc unit 300 and sandwiched by the left and right disc side middle covers 330. The surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the plate side middle cover 330 is formed so as to be smoothly continuous.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower countersinking slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided in order to hold the moving position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc ball out slider 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc ball out slider 353 toward the back The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the biasing force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is pivoted to the rear, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slider 353 is moved backward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower counters ball 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower disc ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower disc ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball out hole 352 b is released The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if it is held in alignment with the removal hole 3324 b and the lower tray removal button 354 is not kept pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be distributed to the bowl unit 300 by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attaching portion 310 b formed in the upper end decorative portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 which protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 45 to FIG. FIG. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the top surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the top surface of the base member 420 A dial decoration substrate 430 having an opening 430a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the button operation cylinder 416b and the dial operation unit 401 can pass and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface And the lower side of the base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressure operation unit 405 And.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416 f for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An inner opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410; Have. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420 h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  In addition, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pattern machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422 a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from coming upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  As shown, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 extends in the vertical direction at the center and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the dial operation portion 401 (except for the collar portion 401d) can pass. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is mounted on the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is mounted on the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover main body 426 is The front cover 428 is attached to the top surface.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410 It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step 407a and the projection 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom (dish unit 300) of the operation unit attachment portion 314c Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and any problems with the dial drive means 414 due to overheating can be prevented. It can be made to withstand high loads Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing gaming balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to reliably store a large number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the figure, through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300 to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A handle base 502 fixed in a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle The rotary handle main body front 506 fixed to the front of the main body rear 504 and made integral with the rotary handle main body 504 and arranged on the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and fixed to the handle base 502 In cooperation with rotating handle body front 506 and rotation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed so as to project rearward from the front side to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle main body, and has a shaft member 510 having a noncircular bearing portion 510a at its rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510 A rotational position detection sensor 512 having a detection shaft portion 512a fitted to the 510a and made rotatable and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched by the handle base 502 A sensor support member 514 fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and having a through hole 514a through which the detection axis 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514; The single rotation button 520 rotatably supported on the material 514 and operating the firing stop switch 518, and the rotary handle front 506 and the rotary handle rear 504 disposed at initial rotation positions And a handle return spring 522 biased to return to the counterclockwise rotation end in a front view).

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to this example has a cylindrical shape in which the front end side has a hemispherical shape that is expanded toward the front side and has a hemispherical shape and the rear end side has an open rear end. In the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side, three axially extending grooves 502a are formed. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  The handle device 500 has an arc-shaped slit 506a disposed concentrically with the rotation shaft in the front of the rotating handle main body 506, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. The mounting bosses 508 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506 a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, whereby the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504, 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b that protrudes rearward is formed on the front of the rotating handle main body 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is engaged with the sensor support member 514, and the handle return spring 522 causes the rotary handle main body 504 to be locked. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, detection of the rotational position detection sensor 512 via the shaft member 510 The shaft portion 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player contacts the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is supposed to be. Then, when the rotary handle main body 504, 506 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball It is possible to type in That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball can not be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the launch solenoid 654. It is supposed to be. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, the operation before the one-shot button 520 is performed. It is possible to fire the game ball with a hitting strength.

  The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotation operation of the rotation handle main bodies 504 and 506 by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then controls the firing based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the part 4120, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the striking ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 like a conventional pachinko machine There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so as to be linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, simplifying the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and the player's interest is reduced due to the hitting defect of the game ball. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2 I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the fal cover unit in the door frame, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the fal cover unit in the door frame, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the front cover of the fal cover unit in a removed state.

  The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. The game ball (Fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 open on the front side and having a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction with the first ball inlet 542a, and the front end of the cover base 542 A second ball inlet 542c disposed on the outer side (right side in rear view) of the first ball inlet 542a and larger than the first ball inlet 542a; The second ball inlet 542c is in communication with the ball passage 542d, extends downward, and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view in the interior of the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of gaming balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. It can be supplied to the upper tray 101 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300 from 544a. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 from the lower tray ball supply rod 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300 from 544b.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launch device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552 and. As shown in FIG. 54, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of gaming balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540, If the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540 and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also full, gaming balls are distributed to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). The second ball inlet 542 c, the second ball passage 542 d, and the second ball outlet 544 of the far cover unit 540 from the full tank outlet 776 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with gaming balls, the game balls can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and stagnated in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d The game ball will be stored. Furthermore, as game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped in the payout control board 4110, and the dish unit for the player A notification prompting the player to discharge the gaming balls in 300 to the outside is performed.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2 J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and seen from the rear. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to be able to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587 a and a side engaged with the ball feeding actuating rod 586 A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operation rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the weight portion 583 c. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It can be prevented that the partition part 583a bounces back.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650. The game is performed in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (the ball feed member 584 or the ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583), and the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. The ball feed member 584 and the ball hitting and firing device 650 also come close to each other as much as possible, and remain on the ball feed member 584 when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is ejected by operating the upper disc ball release button 341. The number of gaming balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball is hit The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. The 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entrance 581 a into contact with the ball hitting supply port 582 Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl ball withdrawal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as in the above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the pivoting collar portion 583b of the dividing portion 583a, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the pivoting collar portion whose impact is bent It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotation shaft by dispersing the pressure by the 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotation flange portion 583 b, so that the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2 K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 is disposed at the left and right ends vertically apart from each other, and includes four pieces 592a extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate extending horizontally along the lower end and downwardly extending And an interlocking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 23, FIG. 28, etc.).

  As described above, in the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. In order to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 to the right of the lower tray 302 in the front view right side of the lower tray 302 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper sides of the game window 101. Thus, the plate unit 300 is disposed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 across the side speaker cover 290, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has an appearance with a continuous and integrated unity.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the opening 328 a of the lower plate cover 328. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on or off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250, and the light emissions of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same light emitting mode (the light emitting color and the light emitting pattern are the same), the entire light emitting decoration can be substantially uniform, and if the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a When it is made to be able to make it a light emission decoration that there was a break in the circumferential direction, when the light emission modes are made different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, they glow radially around the center of the game window 101 It can be a light emitting decoration, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 for supporting the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die casting, and the base member 420 is formed of the plate unit 300 by the cover main body 426. Because the operation unit attachment portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and then the base member 420 is lowered. It will be in contact with the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c via the cover 424, so that the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc. can be alleviated and breakage of the operation unit 400 can be prevented. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and even if the player etc. strongly strikes the pressing operation unit 405, the dial operation unit 401 as well. Since the impact performed by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, it is possible to prevent concentration of the impact and make it difficult to break. Also, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 rotatably supporting the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly project from the upper surface from below, and the dial operation When the impact striking the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) through the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can be in contact with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation portion holding member 416 can be reduced and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by an impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached from the upper side to the plate unit 300, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[1-2 L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.59 and FIG.60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 60 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 has a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which the LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210 a and 250 a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the radiation lens units 210 b and 250 b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by the side decoration frames 202 and 242 which are opaque (in this example, have a plated layer on the surface) Is enclosed.

  The side inner lenses 212 and 252 are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250, and the body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 face the rear surfaces of the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a. The light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed to extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. It is done. Although detailed illustration is omitted in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface, and the decoration substrates 214, 216 and 254 disposed on the rear side. , 256 can be diffused.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b, 250b. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decoration The normal brightness lower than the LED 286 b of the upper decorative substrate 286 in the unit 280 is considered. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed on the upper and lower sides corresponding to the side sub lenses 228 in the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b emitting light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portion of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction. To decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has a large central lens 282 formed in the center in the center, a side lens 284 formed obliquely on both the upper and lower left sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 disposed. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lenses 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent (white) member. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on its surface, and can diffusely reflect or diffuse light, so it can be transmitted through the transparent central lens 282 Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to glow. In addition, the upper decoration substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative substrate 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, the side lenses 284 and the lower lens 289 A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, which are disposed on the left and the right, respectively) disposed on the side are provided. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a white LED of high brightness. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the plurality of light guide portions 318a in the upper plate upper lens 318 along the front end of the upper plate 301 are connected to the upper plate along the front end of the upper plate 301. It is arranged in a state of being exposed through the opening 316a of the front decoration member 316, and when viewed from the front, the lower side outer side of the game window 101 by the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 as shown. The lower side is decorated. Under the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guiding portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 to diffusely reflect or irregularly refract light. As in the case of the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is given a richness and a sparkling brilliance, thereby The light section 318a looks as if it were a gem. The upper dish upper inner lens 319 does not allow the upper dish right decoration substrate 320 and the upper dish left decoration board 322 disposed on the lower side to be seen from the player side through the light guide 318a.

  A plurality (six in this example) of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 in the dish unit 300 correspond to the light guide portions 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318. LEDs 320a, 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are full color LEDs. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are also white, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 correspond to the first annular group 102 and the The radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) radially extends around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two-ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction. In addition, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub lenses 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are the upper right side group 105, and one of the upper right sides of the door frame 5 is lit by appropriately emitting the LEDs 214c. The portion (side sub lens 228) can be decorated to emit light.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 emits and decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is considered as a group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 286a of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and a reference point of the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 Can be made to emit light. In addition, the LEDs 286 b corresponding to the side lenses 284 and the lower lenses 289 in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately illuminated to illuminate and embellish the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, and the upper side of the game window 101 (including the upper part) Can be made to emit light in a V-shape.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, an LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 in the plate unit 300 for decorating the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a are connected to a lower group 108 for emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the lower ends on the left and right of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting the LEDs 320 a and 322 a of the lower group 108, and the LEDs 214 a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. , 216a, 254a, 256a, the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 can be decorated to emit light in a ring shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation unit group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be obtained. It is possible to notify the player.

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  The twenty LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b and 256 b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104 a to 104 h for each of the radiation lens parts 210 b and 250 b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems of an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Furthermore, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. Further, the six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d three by three from the front right side. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as mentioned above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 432 d belongs, are further provided with three independent systems of RGB in order to emit light in full color. It is 84 lines of double. The LEDs 286 b and 430 b are white LEDs of high brightness, and the four systems 107 a, 107 b, 109 a and 109 b to which the LEDs 286 b and 430 b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness. Two systems are connected in each case, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into red LED, and belongs to 2 system | strain 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  In addition, the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101 are coordinated with the LEDs provided on the front of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000 etc. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 disposed outside the first annular group 102, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, light is circulated around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 108a to 108d. Light may be directed toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light may be transmitted along the outer periphery of the game window 101 from the central lens 282. It is possible to make a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of In addition, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210 b and 250 b circulate.

  In addition, it is possible for the light to be rotated in the central lens 282 by causing each system 106 a to 106 c to emit light simultaneously by causing each system 106 a to 106 c of the upper center group 106 to emit light simultaneously, or sequentially emitting light from each system 106 a to 106 c. Light emission effects can be performed. In addition, by making the upper central side group 105 emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player comes to a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability change game) It is possible to perform a light emission effect that suggests a state, a time saving game state, a probability changing short game state, etc.). The lower lens 289 is arranged to emit light toward the player from above the player's head, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286 b. .

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, a light emission effect for emitting and decorating the front edge of the upper tray 301 or emitting light in association with the operation group 109 is performed. Or, a light emission effect can be performed to urge the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

  As described above, in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are close to the game window 101. A plurality of outer sides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) can be divided because the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be divided to emit light. The pachinko machine can be illuminated and decorated in a substantially concentric fashion, and by surrounding the outer periphery of the game window 101, a light can be rendered without the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine can attract the interest of the player strongly It is designed to be one.

  In addition, one circumferential lens portion 210a and 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged substantially concentrically, and even if the appearance looks like one, each of the two systems of LEDs emits light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentric, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the external appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a by the light emission decoration (right side decoration unit 200 and left side decoration unit It is possible to make the change of 240) large and to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emission decoration.

  Further, the LEDs 214b, 216b, and 214b arranged radially on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 of the left and right decoration units 200, 240 in the door frame 5 outside the transparent game window 101 closing the front of the game area 1100. And an LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are circumferentially divided by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Since the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are lit depending on the game state, the outer circumference of the game window 101 can be decorated with a plurality of rings. And I have never seen it on a conventional pachinko machine It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  In addition, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 configured by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60) ), And by emitting light in the second ring group 103 and then the first ring group 102 in this order from the outside to the Can make the player's attention turn to the game area 1100, and can make it think that something good may be done in the game area 1100, thereby increasing the expectation for the game It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. Furthermore, by emitting light in order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside toward the outside, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, ie, the game area 1100, The light emission effect that spreads out makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation that something is good, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light emission effect can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only the player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1, but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The above-described luminous effects can be shown to the player in the game hall, and the other player's attention is strongly drawn to make it easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game Can.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 radially disposed so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 extending in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by emitting the radial groups 104, an accent can be given to the luminous decoration, The change of the light emitting decoration can strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 correspond to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by the radial groups 104 arranged radially. Since the light is divided into the groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each group 102a to 102j and 103a Thus, it is possible to perform light emission effects such that the light moves in the circumferential direction, and by providing more colorful light emission effects, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 hard to get tired.

  Furthermore, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lenses 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Since it is possible to change the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 as compared with the case where the radiation lenses 210b and 250b are integrally included in the peripheral lenses 210a and 250a, it is possible to change the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250. Even when the light emitting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly. Incidentally, even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a which are annularly arranged and the LEDs 214b and 216b which are radially arranged , 254b and 256b can be made to emit light in the same light emission mode, so that it becomes possible to illusion the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b to be integrated, and the outer periphery of the game window 101 is integrated Light emission decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  In addition, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 circumferentially partitioned by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b radially disposed on one circumferential lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 , 216a, 254a, 256a, and even if the appearance looks like one, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light, respectively. Since the light emission decoration can be performed substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased. Increase the impact of decoration to draw the player's attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, a side inner lens 212 that diffuses the light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 and irradiates the side lenses 210, 250 with the light. Since the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be prevented from having unevenness due to the provision of the light emitting diode 252, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and in addition, the LEDs 214a, 216a, Since the side lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated like a plane even with the use of 254a and 256a, light emitters emitting linear light (for example, cold cathode tubes (fluorescent tubes), neon tubes, organic EL, etc.) The first annular group 1 can be obtained by individually emitting each of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a as compared to the case where It becomes possible to change the light emission in the second and second ring groups 103 also in the circumferential direction, and more various light emission effects can be presented, making it difficult to get bored and suppressing the decrease in the player's interest The pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by irregular refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. It is difficult to look at the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 arranged on the screen, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. from being directly seen from the player side. Can.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b is guided by the light guiding parts 212b, 252b of the side inner lenses 212, 252 and irradiated to the radiation lens parts 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b can be reliably guided to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b for light emission decoration, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably embodied. In addition, even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b is long due to the light guiding portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are assured Therefore, the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 is sufficient to widely illuminate the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a which secure the space, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 is surrounded by the side decoration frames 202 and 242, the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is a radiation lens It is possible to reduce as much as possible the influence of light from the light emitting lens portions 210b and 250b to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a to the portions 210b and 250b, and it is possible that the respective light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the light emission effect with a good appearance.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Also, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side which protrudes to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. In a state where the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 98 etc. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and descends the foul space 626 A game ball is received at the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is suspended from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game balls to be distributed. The body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game balls distributed in the ball removal passage 741 d in the winning ball device 740 will be described later in detail. It is distributed.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3 B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642a and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642 c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device launcher in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking and launching apparatus in the main body frame. This ball striking device firing device 650 can strike the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with the strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass at the same time as the 658 is made passable. The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose circular arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. It is possible to As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by rotation of the hitting ball 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of a winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a flow passage of balls in the winning ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Based on the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A payout device 740 to pay out based on the instruction and a gaming ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the gaming ball Mainly comprises a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the lower end rear side of the upper side lower end of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a laterally elongated box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view of a horizontally elongated 721 and an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes in a rectangular shape only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) from the bottom wall 710 in plan view; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 , A rod-like shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, a base portion of the shaft portion 725 near the base end and outer circumferential wall 722 on both front sides Awarded at 720 Ball Base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and the game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. The bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730 and can prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730 and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of gaming balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) opened downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After being received, it can be rolled to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. And an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the gaming balls in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the gaming ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the gaming balls arranged in two rows alternately receive prize balls one by one It is sent to the device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the gaming balls fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, passes the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 through the slit 734a, and is inside the tank rail 730. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 delivers the gaming balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens at the upper end on the rear side and extends slightly to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end of the distribution space 741b in the rear view right side (axial support side) and extending downward and opening on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 c of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  In addition, the winning ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the winning ball passage 741c. Sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 A sensor base 753 and a prize ball relay board 754 relaying the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 Have.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 in between, and a supply channel earth that can contact gaming balls circulating in the supply channel 741 a of the unit base 741 A metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and for grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be detachably supported on the unit base 741 A detachable button 759 is provided.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and is present in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the presence / absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the out-of-ball switch 741e. When the gaming ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball breakage switch 741e (ball breakage state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the player or the hole is that the ball breakage. It is reported to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is eliminated. It is possible to

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748 a of a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, etc. is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the ball withdrawal switch 860b is operated, or the like. By rotating 744, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side. It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full dispensing unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit The sheet can be discharged to the outside on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 at 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full-tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300 When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the upper center in the front-rear direction. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. Prize ball socket 771 for receiving gaming balls having flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball socket 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79) The game ball having flowed through the normal passage 773 and the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full passage 775 for guiding the game ball toward the front side from the position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receptacle 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79) A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game balls received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game balls distributed through the ball removal passage 778 are released forward to the normal ball outlet 774 And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540, and The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base 600 The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receiving opening 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball that has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is placed on the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a It will be supplied to the dish 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740, until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking unit It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the gaming ball paid out immediately below the winning ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Because the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 hit the ball launching device The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so the game ball of the same amount as the conventional is stored in the upper plate 301 Can. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray The game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage dishes is different. .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning bowl device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and Even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 may be different, so that the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Furthermore, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the fal cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 Can block the flow of gaming balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the open / close crank 793 and the open / close operation piece 542g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball exit opening / closing unit 790 automatically automatically outputs the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 at the front end of the full Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after being disassembled and viewed. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 A plurality of longitudinally elongated slit-shaped through holes in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. In addition, the substrate base unit 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Also, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side favorably by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the substrate unit 800 is literally provided with the speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby reversing the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and moving forward. The speaker box is designed as a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deep bass to the aperture of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is removed from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 844 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, when the launch power supply substrate box 830 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately provided. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is easy The interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654, and reaches the life On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the strike launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3 holding the game board 4 When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the firing power supply substrate 831 (firing power supply substrate box 830) of the firing control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matched the concept of the new model to be replaced etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, While the effort required for replacement can be simplified, it can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. The cost of reducing the cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hole side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they are before. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is degraded, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the degradation and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced. And the problem can be resolved, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be quickly resolved to feel frustrating or to feel disappointing. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 receives the gaming balls discharged upward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the gaming board 4 to the upper left on the left front than the left and right center in front view. Ejecting ball receiving portion 841, Ejecting passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 downward, Ejecting passage 842 and front of the side of Ejecting passage 842 and Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed to be recessed forward and the front end of the power supply substrate box 850 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The back side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed and flows through the main frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810. The game balls flowed down and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described later in detail, pass through the discharge passage 842 behind the pachinko machine 1 Can be discharged into the

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the Here, as shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply board box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the standing wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding backward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  Power supply substrate box 850 and power supply substrate holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of speaker box 820. When mounted, the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is absent. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853 It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. And 86, a delivery control board 4110 (see FIG. 195) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In this payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the substrate base 871 of the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is open. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 88, in the assembled state, the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 The needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the (rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and the crime prevention capability is high. It can be

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 5 such that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 5 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, main side relay terminal board 880 and peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of main body frame base 600. As well as connecting terminals for connecting with the door frame 5 side only through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connecting terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3 G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover disassembled and viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, etc. Is supposed to be on the back side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and the back cover 900 The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. The through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3, the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. Located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 included in the unit so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted well. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw 924 straight against the back cover fastening hole 770b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 elastically engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms a left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 And a positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front end right from the front end of the side plate 952a Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller amount of projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 of the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axial support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See FIG. 106). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the case is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952 b In this state, the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is in contact with the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 even if the door frame 5 is forced open with respect to the main body frame 3. It becomes possible to abut and prevent the pivotal support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened up Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by the unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. Also, after the main frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, the crime prevention side plate 950 on the side (axial support side) on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is improper such as a bur Even if it is scolded by such a tool, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is made to extend backward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, so that the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a becomes longer Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the whole of the crime prevention side plate 950 can be further enhanced, and the crime prevention side plate 950 can be prevented from being bent forcibly and cheating .

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the crime prevention side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent It can be reduced as much as possible, and a security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3 I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding door for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and seen from the rear, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding door for glass door and the sliding door for main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view are attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure which makes it difficult for the user to tamper with the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw fixing portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle part of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open sides 1001a and 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part, and lower part of both side faces 1001 a and 1001 b, By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places at the top, middle, bottom of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B), it swings (clockwise direction in FIG. 97).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting restriction protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are vertically penetrated in the left and right direction on the front side of the restriction protrusion 1031 are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 causes the spring locking hole 1036 to lock the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The sliding door 1040 for a door is provided with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame that protrudes toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding wedge 1040 is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 and the door frame The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a sliding door wedge. It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; and a lower side of the spring hook 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 The pieces 1043 are inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned with each other and overlapped. In a state where the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the sliding of the main frame After inserting the wedge 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing to the opening 1029 with a screw not shown.

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction. The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud preventing member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size in the horizontal and vertical directions of the game board 4 is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A sliding door 1040 for a door frame and a sliding door for a main body frame in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and can exhibit the same effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to form a prize ball base rear wall portion 710b. Transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the game machine and gaming balls discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction And a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main frame base 600, the rear surface of which is behind the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane, the rear of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A pachinko machine capable of visually recognizing the side and the back side, and easily checking the back side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 covering the back side of the game board 4 It can be one.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facilities where the game machine 4 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the gaming board using the gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc., and FIG. 104 is a gaming viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 for containing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game content to be played by putting a game ball into the game area 1100 and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. Although this game board 4 is not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and will be described in detail later, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150 It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 115 and the like).

  The basic configuration of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the substrate holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The inner periphery of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the lateral direction. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In this front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 An extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650 is located. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, when the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow to the lower end of the game area 1100. Are guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower side of the back of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. To be inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so that the protrusion 182 after crime prevention substantially contacts the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire which is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc and recessed from the front side; In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage cutout portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to regulate movement in the back and forth direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is supposed to be. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and fastening each other, and unauthorized removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front view on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner circumferential rail 1113. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 that project rearward from left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 that project rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixing boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and screws a predetermined screw from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixing boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning projection 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting it to the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4 B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower center of the front view in the left and right direction. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155, and a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed downward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101) And a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example is capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, and although illustration is omitted, Within the corresponding range, a plurality of obstacle nails are to be implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is to be attached. In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is an out-ball The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the above are all discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 is provided with a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are adapted to be fitted with the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 after the tip is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 With the boss 1126 fitted, the inside of the fixing boss 1162 is penetrated from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126, whereby the substrate holder 1160 with respect to the front component 1110 is It can be assembled, and the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion capable of fitting the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 from the side at the left end of the rear wall in the rear surface An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. And a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And a resilient fixing piece that is resiliently engaged with a locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 that protrudes rearward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end portion of the rear view two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 in between, sealing the opening and closing of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 Seal (not shown) which is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealed seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control substrate box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the delivery control substrate box 860 in the substrate unit 800, and caulking fixation is performed on any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is done. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 needs to cut the caulked fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1170 remains. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even if it can be confirmed visually from the outside, it can be prevented that those fraudulent acts are performed.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c or the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like come to the rear side. Incidentally, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100 f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170, Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 or the sealing seal is cleverly worked, the presence or absence of an unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than by visual observation, and a pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance is provided. It can be done.

[1-4 E. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and the front component 1110. And a rear protrusion 1182 protruding rearward than the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102A, the game state changed by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view Play status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 For the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and for the first special lottery result which is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and received by the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as and the second starting opening 210 disposed on the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 To the right of the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery results drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 and comprising two LEDs lined up and down.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate unit 2401 by the game ball is An ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying and an ordinary lottery result arranged by passing the game ball through the gate part 2401 arranged under the ordinary symbol storage indicator is displayed as an ordinary symbol The special symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for the purpose, and the normal special symbol storage indicator 1188 are arranged side by side to the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" when the "big hit" And a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern 2103.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink By the combination, various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, positive short time state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the number of first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b when the number of reservations is four It blinks together. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and after the 7 segment LED fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, it stops after the change and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7 segment LED The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate part 2401. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  Further, when the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2401 when the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the ordinary symbol in the normal symbol indicator 1189, the start of the variation display is suspended It is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the stored standard symbols. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present example, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a 10-round indicator lamp 1190a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, and the respective lamps are turned on to round the "big hit" game. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol memory The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 195). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk or the like in the hall can be made to recognize the position of the display portion 1181 without confusion To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, and movement of the game ball The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of dividing the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 is a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 1100, and the synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic board. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and it is necessary minimum that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail (not shown) is planted on the front or the table unit 2000 is attached. The thickness (8 to 10 mm) is considered. In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction and vertically. Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1213 having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 1213 is cut out to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the attacker unit 2100 and the center character 2500 etc., which will be described in detail later. The unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (see FIG. 133 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 1150 made of wood described above (in this example, about 20 mm) and made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). In the panel holder 1220, a holding step 1221 detachably holding a panel plate 1210 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221 It mainly comprises a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It becomes almost the same plane as. The front inner circumferential surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1210. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1223 which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claws 1224 are disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, correspond to the upper engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and extend from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. It protrudes toward and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1213. The engagement claw 1224 is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed in the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, the plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held on the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 is a mounting boss of the front component 1110 By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed on the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount of depression ( Depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 113 etc.) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support 1227 And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4 is used as the main frame It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the rear side of the mounting support 1227 and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3001 a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height from the front side of the accommodation recess 630h. In this case, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the back surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming ball is fired from the bat firing device 650 But they are guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110 And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 inserted in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner in front view And an insertion hole 1234.

  In addition, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 A notch 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and is cut away so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharging groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placement portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning projection 607, and by the out ball discharging groove 1235 being fitted with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 is moved relative to the main frame 3 in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224 and the engagement piece 1225 engage with the engagement step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 become substantially flush, and a conventionally used obstacle nail planting It is possible to set the panel board 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail implanting apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without remodeling the installation apparatus, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost for implanting the obstacle nail It can be done.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 is configured to be divided by the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, an increase in weight of the entire gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even when the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and a transparent panel The pachinko machine 1 which can be seen by the player from the rear side of the game area 1100 can be embodied through the board 1210, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 whose position such as the obstacle nail or the winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part The panel holder 1220 can be a common part, and by replacing only the panel plate 1210, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 and FIG. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the gaming board housed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. The side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front and rear direction. A plate-like side piece 952a which forms the side of the main body frame 3 and a front end which extends inward (open side) from the front end of the side piece 952a. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It is enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 and the like well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. A rear-side piece of the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is axially supported. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is tentatively Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and cheating is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950 so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to sufficiently fight against the vandalism of Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side and the side of the game board 4 can be viewed through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. from the rear side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame for maintenance or model change When you remove the game board 4 against 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt, etc. remain between the main unit frame 3 and the game board 4, those should be outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing the second attachment unit in an easy-to-see manner, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board from diagonally right front, It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. From the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when it is attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the front view lower right corner of the front component 1110 and a frame-shaped front component 1110 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven A plurality of function display units 1180 disposed at visible positions, and a plurality of front-side components 1110 attached to the rear side of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front and back direction with a predetermined shape corresponding to the game area 1100 And a plate-shaped game panel 1200 which has an opening 1215 (see FIG. 113 etc.) and divides the rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1200 of this example is a transparent panel plate 1210 formed in a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component 1110; And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 for holding the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner from the front side. The opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, a decorative seal 1102 having a pattern according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front side of the transparent panel plate 1210 on the game panel 1200 of this example (see FIG. 113). The decorative seal 1102 is formed with an opening 1102 a penetrating a predetermined amount (for example, 0.2 mm to 1 mm) large relative to the outer diameter of the obstacle nail G implanted in the panel plate 1210. And the decorative seal 1102 does not come in contact with it. By the way, when a contraction difference occurs between the decorative seal 1102 and the panel plate 1210 due to temperature change, aging, etc., the decorative seal 1102 is pulled or pushed by the obstacle nail G moving with the panel plate 1210. Although there is a risk that the decorative seal 1102 may be wrinkled and the appearance may be deteriorated, the decorative seal 1102 is provided with the opening 1102 a having a diameter larger than that of the obstacle nail G, so only the gap with the obstacle nail G at the opening 1102 a It is possible to avoid contact with the obstacle nail G to avoid being pulled or pushed, and it is possible to prevent wrinkles from being generated in the decorative seal 1102 due to temperature change, aging change, etc. The appearance of the gaming panel 1200 (within the gaming area 1100) can be maintained in a good state.

  This decorative seal 1102 is partially applied to a transparent film so that a pattern etc. has translucency, and the decoration of the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the transparent portion The members 3064 and 3065, the back bottom movable effect unit 3600, and the like are visible from the player side (see FIG. 109). Further, as described above, the decorative seal 1102 is formed so that the design etc. has light transmitting properties, the back left top decoration unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and the back left decoration member 3704 of the back left movable effect unit 3700, etc. By emitting light in a plane, light can be emitted as if the pattern is self-luminous. Thereby, the pattern (the decoration seal 1102) of the gaming panel 1200 partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 can be made to emit light, so that the pattern (the gaming area 1100) can be made conspicuous, and the interest of the player is strongly drawn The pachinko machine 1 can be attached.

  In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached from the front to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a back side of the back unit 3000 And a liquid crystal display device 1900 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, which can be viewed from the player side, and a substrate attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. A holder 1160 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 are provided.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is disposed along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 at the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 located on the upper side of the out port 1151 at the lower part in the gaming area 1100 And a gate member 2400 disposed on the upper side of the front left movable rendering unit 2300 and slightly above the center of the game area 1100 in the upper side of the front left movable rendering unit 2300 and a substantially central portion of the playing area 1100. And a center character 2500 in the form of a frame.

  Also, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box shape attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and the back box 3001 having an opening 3001 c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display 1900 formed in the back wall 3001 b. The back upper left decoration unit 3050 is disposed at the front corner in the front view above the opening 3001 c near the front in the back box 3001 and is disposed below the opening 3001 c near the front in the back box 3001 The ball guiding unit 3060 for guiding the gaming ball received by the front unit 2000 downwards, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 attached to the front side of the back wall 3001 b of the back box 3001, and the back movement within the back box 3000 Back-up back movable effect unit 3200 disposed on the upper side and front side of the rendering unit 3100, and back-up back movable effect unit A back-up front movable effect unit 3400 disposed on the front side of 3200, a back-back movable effect unit 3500 disposed between a ball guiding unit 3060 and a back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000, and a ball guide The unit includes a back lower movable effect unit 3600 attached to the front side of the unit 3060, and a back left movable effect unit 3700 disposed on the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000. .

  The back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001 c penetrating in the back and forth direction in the back wall 3001 b so that the display screen faces the front (player's side) from the opening 3001 c. A liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001 b of the back box 3001.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 for housing a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 is provided. There is.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is disposed on the upper side of the out port 1151 at the lower center of the game area 1100 and is supported by the front of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210). Of the table left movable effect unit 2300 disposed on the upper left side of the game area and extending to the center in the left and right direction from the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and slightly above the center of the game area 1100 above the table left movable effect unit 2300 A gate member 2400 disposed and supported on the front of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center product 2500 disposed substantially in the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150.

  Although the details will be described later, the first start port 2101 where the gaming ball can always be received, and the gate section of the gate member 2400 disposed under the first start port 2101 in the attack unit 2100 of the front unit 2000. The second starting opening 2102 which can receive the game ball according to the normal lottery result which is drawn when the game ball passes through 2401 and the first starting opening 2101 which is disposed below the second starting opening 2102 The special winning opening 2103 which can receive the gaming ball according to the special lottery result which is drawn by the reception of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102, and two each on the left and right sides above the big winning opening 2103 There are provided four general winning openings 2104 which are arranged and can always receive a game ball.

  In addition, although the details will be described later in the attacking unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, an object located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 on both the left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103 (for example, a player playing this pachinko machine 1) The projector unit 2150 includes a pair of projector units 2150 (2150L, 2150R) for projecting a predetermined image with the subject being a projection object. The projector unit 2150 is configured such that light to be emitted (projected) does not easily enter the player's field of view.

  Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail later, but it is formed to become lower as it goes to the right in front view, and the game ball 1100 that has flowed down the game area 1100 is It has a shelf 2301a that can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction in. The front left movable effect unit 2300 has three decoration bodies 2302, 2303 and 2304 imitating a lantern on the lower side of the shelf 2301a, which will be described in detail later, and swinging it according to the game state It is possible to Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is formed to form a pair with the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center character 2500.

  Further, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 is provided with a gate portion 2401 sized to pass only one game ball, and a gate sensor for detecting the game ball having passed through the gate portion 2401 2402 is provided.

  The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially at the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side is visible from the player side. It is formed in the shape of a frame having a window 2501 which can be made. In this center role 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) and a game ball flowing down the inside of the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A circumferential wall 2503, a warp inlet 2504 opened at a predetermined position of the circumferential wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 for releasing game balls entering the warp inlet 2504 into a frame, and a gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing the ball into the game area 1100 and returning it to the game area 1100 after rolling.

  Further, although details will be described later, the center role 2500 has an object detection unit 2530 capable of detecting an object located on the front side (the player side) of the game area 1100 and A logo decoration unit 2540 disposed along an arc-shaped outer periphery in the right direction, a second attacker unit 2550 disposed below the logo decoration unit 2540 and to the right of the stage 2510, and a second attacker unit 2550 It has a front right movable effect unit 2600 arranged to be paired with the front left movable effect unit 2300 on the side.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the attacker unit, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the bottom rear. Moreover, FIG. 119 is a front view of (a) an attacker unit, (b) is a BB sectional view in (a). Further, FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing a projection area by the projector unit of the attacker unit.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the gaming board 4 in the front unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed at the lower part in the center in the left-right direction of the panel board 1210 of the gaming panel 1200. It is fixed to the front of 1200 (panel board 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, a first start opening 2101 disposed at the uppermost position substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a second start opening 2102 disposed below (directly below) the first start opening 2101, and a second start opening A rectangular winning opening 2103 disposed below (below) the 2102 and extending in the left-right direction more than the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and a high winning opening at a higher position than the winning opening 2103 A total of four general winning openings 2104 are provided, two on each of the left and right sides of 2103.

  The upper side of the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open, and game balls can be always accepted (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101 has a pair of vane-shaped movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on the left and right sides of the second start port 2102 as illustrated. Thus, the space between the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2101 is closed, and the gaming ball can not be received by the second starting opening 2102 in the illustrated state. The lower end side of the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 is pivotally supported rotatably, and the upper end side is pivoted in a direction away from each other to expand the second start port The game ball is ready to be received at 2102. That is, the second start opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2106 which can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported about a substantially lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive the game ball, and the upper side is directed to the front side. When it is pivoted to move, it is possible to open the big winning opening 2103 and make it possible to receive the game ball. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  In the attacker unit 2100, the width in the left-right direction of the first starting opening 2101 is slightly larger than the outline of the gaming ball, and the size (width) is such that the gaming ball can be received one by one. In addition, the second start opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in the direction away from each other to expand three times the width of the game ball It is considered to be five times as wide. Further, the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is in the open state is five to eight times the width of the outer shape of the gaming ball. As a result, in a state where the respective winning openings 2101, 2102, and 2103 can be received, the game ball can be more easily accepted as the lower winning opening.

  In addition, the four general winning openings 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are opened upward on both the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103, and are positioned higher as they get farther from the special winning opening 2103. The first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103 are arranged substantially symmetrically with respect to an axis connecting the centers in the left-right direction.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front of the panel board 1210 in the gaming panel 1200, and has a first starting opening 2101 and a big winning opening 2103 at a position corresponding to the center of the gaming area 1100 in the left-right direction. , And a plate-like base plate 2110 capable of forming the second start opening 2102 and the general winning opening 2104 and a lower front surface of the first start opening 2101 in the base plate 2110 and capable of rotating a pair of movable pieces 2105 On the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 in the base plate 2110. And four side receiving members 2112 which are attached and open at the upper side and the rear side.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and pivotally supports an opening and closing member 2106 for opening and closing the large winning opening 2103, and rotationally drives the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening and closing member 2106 For a predetermined target (for example, a player) mounted on the right and left sides of the attacker drive unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110 and located on the front side (player side) of the attacker unit 2100 And a pair of projector units 2150 capable of projecting an image.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and the surface is decorated with a shallow relief. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110 a which has a size that allows the game ball to pass therethrough in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second start opening 2102. Further, the base plate 2110 is provided with a hook portion 2110 b which can be extended rearward from the position where the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are formed and which can guide the gaming ball. Further, the base plate 2110 is formed at a position lower than the general winning opening 2104 between the two general winning openings 2104 arranged on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103, and the tip lens of the projector unit 2150 is It has a circular lens opening 2110 c facing the lens.

  The central receiving member 2111 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the attacker unit 2000 is formed in a fan shape in which the front surface bulges upward. Although not shown in detail, the central support member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at an interval wider than the left and right width of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by these shaft portions.

  Further, the four side receiving members 2112 are formed in a disk shape on the front surface, and are formed in a bowl shape in which the upper side and the rear side are released.

  Furthermore, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 supports the start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2105 for opening and closing the second start port 2102, and the start port solenoid 2121 to support the rear side of the base plate 2110. A starter opening drive mechanism base 2123 attached to the main body, an attachment solenoid 2124 for opening and closing an opening and closing member 2106 for closing the big winning opening 2103, and an attachment solenoid 2124 while supporting the opening and closing member 2106 rotatably. The game drive ball base supported on a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the start hole drive mechanism base 2123 and the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 is received in the second start hole 2102 A second start port sensor 2127 for detecting A count sensor 2128 which is supported at a position different from the start opening sensor 2127 and detects gaming balls received in the big winning opening 2103, and supported by the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and which has a start opening solenoid 2121 and an attachment solenoid 2124 and a second A start-up port sensor 2127 and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  The start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger which can be advanced and retracted by energization and urged in a projecting direction by a coil spring, although not shown, and the second start port 2102 is below the first start port 2101. In the rear position, the plunger is supported by the starting opening drive mechanism base 2123 so as to project forward. In the present embodiment, when the starting opening solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2121 retracts against the biasing force of the coil spring, and the pair of movable pieces is engaged via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends 2105 rotate in directions away from each other, and the second start port 2102 is in an open state.

  The starting opening drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so as to be able to accommodate and support the starting opening solenoid 2121 from the front side, and is received by the first starting opening 2101 on the upper surface to The game ball which is formed on the lower side than the first guiding portion 2123a for guiding the gaming ball having circulated the portion 2110b backward and the portion supporting the starting opening solenoid 2121 and guides the gaming ball received to the second starting opening 2102 downward And a second induction portion (not shown in detail).

  Although not shown in the drawings, similarly to the start port solenoid 2121, the attacher solenoid 2124 in the attacher drive unit 2120 can be advanced and retracted by energization and has a plunger biased in a projecting direction by a coil spring. In the present embodiment, when power is applied to the attachment solenoid 2124, the plunger of the attachment solenoid 2124 is retracted, and the upper end of the open / close member 2106 is relatively moved forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 can always receive the game ball. On the other hand, in the second starting opening 2102, the starting opening solenoid 2121 is energized and driven according to the result of the normal drawing in which the game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 in the gate member 2400 described later. The piece 2105 is spread and can be received. In addition, in the special winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the game ball to the 1st starting opening 2101 and the 2nd starting opening 2102 (starting winning combination) (for example, special drawing result is big hit At the same time, the open / close member 2106 can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern so that it can be received by energizing the attachment solenoid 2124.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 includes the special winning opening decoration substrate 2131 supported by the lower part of the attacker driving mechanism base 2126 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the upper surface, so that the special winning opening 2103 can be decorated with light emission. It has become.

  Also, the two projector units 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 are attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and have a translucent mounting base 2151, and a substantially cylindrical projector main body 2152 mounted from the rear side to the mounting base 2151. A cover attached to the rear side of the mounting base 2151 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side thereof, and the rear side of the attacker side decorative substrate 2153 and the projector body 2152 covering the rear side of the mounting base 2151 And 2154.

  A projector body 2152 of the projector unit 2150 is, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), a light source unit 2156 disposed at the rear in the body and capable of emitting light forward (in this example, a high brightness white LED is used) And a plurality of lens groups 2157 disposed in front of the light source unit 2156, and an image film 2158 disposed at a predetermined position in the lens groups 2157 and depicting an image to be projected. By causing the light source unit 2156 to emit light, the projector unit 2150 can project an image drawn on the image film 2158 on an object located in the projection range in front of the projector unit 2150. ing.

  In this example, the optical axes of the left and right projector units 2150R and 2510L do not intersect with each other, and images can be projected to different positions. Also, in this example, the optical axis of the projector unit 2150 is set so that the image is projected to the projection area TR from both shoulders to both chests to the player seated in the normal state on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 120).

  In this attacking unit 2100, the gaming balls received to the first starting opening 2101 and the four general winning openings 2104 pass to the passage hole 3061a and the general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 in the ball guiding unit 3060 of the back unit It is supposed to be sent.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 can also be discharged downward after the gaming ball received to the second starting opening 2102 is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Furthermore, the attacker unit 2100 is configured such that gaming balls received to the special winning opening 2103 are discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is disposed such that the advancing and retracting direction of the plunger 2124 a is in the left and right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is disposed in a position as close as possible to the opening and closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimension in the anteroposterior direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% as compared with the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is an object (for example, a player, another pachinko arranged on the opposite side in the game hall) located outside the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) by the two projector units 2150. Effect images can be projected and displayed on a machine, a wall, etc.), and it is possible to provide the player with a novel image effect not found in conventional pachinko machines, and to attract the interest of the player strongly As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to make it possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the projector unit 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is caused to emit light according to the game state, as shown in FIG. 120, a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the projection area TR covering the player's shoulders, arms and chest. However, the player or the like who does not know the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 does not notice even if the effect by the projector unit 2150 is started because the player is not in the position to notice directly. I will continue playing. On the other hand, since the projection area TR is an area extending from the shoulder to the arm of the player, the image projected from the projector unit 2150 is projected onto the front half of the player's shoulder, arm, etc. When viewed from the side, a part of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 can be seen, and another player can easily notice the effect (the arrival of a chance) by the projector unit 2150. Therefore, another player will notice the arrival of the chance earlier than the player himself, and the person around the player will notice the light-emitting effect by the projector unit 2150 for the first time. Therefore, not only the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 but also other players can increase the sense of expectation for the game together, and make it easy to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play the game. It is possible to

  In addition, since an image is displayed to the player by the projector unit 2150, the player can be greatly surprised by presenting an image effect which has not been seen with a conventional pachinko machine, and the player's attention While being able to be strongly attracted to the image etc. to be projected, the player can be entertained by the image etc. to be projected, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  When a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the player by the projector unit 2150, the light emission decoration is turned off or reduced in each of the decoration units capable of emitting light and provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4. Thus, a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR illuminated by the light emission of the projector unit 2150 may be seen by the player on the glass plate 594 of the glass unit 590 of the door frame 5. This makes it easy to notice the light-emitting effect by the projector unit 2150, and the effect by the projector unit 2150 can be enjoyed.

  Also, after the seating position of the player is detected by the object detection means 2530 provided in the center character 2500 described later, the projector unit 2150 (2150L or 2150R) according to the seating position of the player is illuminated It is also possible to allow the player to reliably project a predetermined image.

  In addition, the projector unit 2150 in the attacker unit 2100 is configured to emit light when the cheating is detected.

[2-3. Front left movable effect unit]
Subsequently, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the front left movable effect unit.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 of the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1200. It is fixed to the front of the panel plate 1210 so as to be in contact with the outer periphery.

  In the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example, one side in a front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and the outer shape in a front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape and a shallow box The first unit body 2301 and the lower left first decorative body 2302 disposed in the unit main body 2301 and rotatably supported at the upper end side and formed into a shape imitating a lantern, and the left side of the first lower left decorative body 2302 A lower left second decorative body 2303, a lower left second decorative body 2303, and a lower left second decorative body 2303 which is disposed in the unit main body 2301 and is rotatably supported at the upper end side and has a shape simulating a lantern. The lower left first decorative body 2302 is movably supported within a predetermined range and is disposed on the rear side of the unit body 2301 via the movable support mechanism 2320 and the movable support mechanism 2320. A lower left side drive solenoid 2330 for moving and driving the lower first decorative body 2302 and a lower left second decorative body 2303, and a lower left side drive solenoid 2330 are mounted on the rear side of the unit body 2301 and the unit body 2301. And a unit base 2304 that supports the movable support mechanism 2320 in cooperation with the above.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 has an upper base plate 2305 mounted on the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend upward from near the rear end on the upper side of the unit body 2301; Right base plate 2306 attached to the front of unit base 2304 so as to extend to the right from near, plate-like decorative member 2307 attached to the front left corner in unit body 2301, attached to the top front end of unit body 2301 And a front lower decoration member 2309 attached to a lower corner of the unit body 2301 and having a predetermined decoration.

  Furthermore, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is attached to the front of the unit base 2304 on the rear side of the unit body 2301 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the left side on the rear side of the unit body 2301 And a left decorative body decorative substrate 2311 disposed on the front side of the decorative substrate 2310 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2304 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Reference numeral 2312 in the figure is a head cover for protecting the tip of the advancing and retracting plunger in the lower left side drive solenoid 2330. In addition, the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is attached to the unit base 2304 so that the plunger moves back and forth from the right side in a front view in the left and right direction.

  The unit main body 2301 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 is formed so that the upper surface formed in a box shape becomes lower toward the right in front view, and the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area 1100 is played The shelf portion 2301 a can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction in the region 1100. Also, the unit body 2301 has three-dimensional irregularities formed on the bottom surface (surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface is formed to have translucency There is. In the unit body 2301, an opening 2301 b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 disposed on the front side through the opening 2301 b of the unit body 2301 and the movable support mechanism 2320 are connected to each other.

  The movable support mechanism 2320 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 is, as illustrated, rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2301 and the unit base 2304 at the lower end side, and the upper end side is the lower left first The lower end of the drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger in the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 at the approximate center of the longitudinal direction and the left side of the drive crank 2321 in a front view left side A hook-like operating link member 2322 rotatably supported on an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2301 and the unit base 2304 on the side, and rotatably supporting the lower left second decorative body 2303 on the upper end side; Actuation link member 2322 is operated to extend substantially parallel to drive crank 2321 And a, a connecting member 2323 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2321 of link member 2322.

  The drive crank 2321 of the movable support mechanism 2320 is configured to support and connect the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the connecting member 2323 by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, similarly to the drive crank 2321, the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the connecting member 2323 are supported and connected by one shaft member on the upper end side of the actuating link member 2322, respectively. Further, the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 are formed such that the distance between the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decoration 2302, 2303 is the same. When the drive support 2322 is rotated by the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the movement support mechanism 2320 rotates so that the actuating link member 2322 is always parallel to the drive crank 2321 via the connection member 2323. There is.

  As illustrated, in the present example, the connecting member 2323 is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the front left movable presentation unit 2300 is equipped with the stopper which restrict | limits the rotation range of the drive crank 2321. FIG.

  The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 are each formed in a shape imitating a lantern as illustrated, and also formed in a plate shape. Further, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are formed to have a light transmitting property. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are assembled as the front left movable effect unit 2300, the lower left first decorative body 2302 is the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is driven so that the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are shaken so that they do not contact each other.

  The upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 are respectively provided with plate-like flange portions 2305 a and 2306 a that can be in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200. The front left movable effect unit 2300 can be attached to the game panel 2300 by fixing the upper base plate 2305 and the flange portions 2305 a and 2306 a of the left base plate 2306 to the front of the game panel 1200. In addition, the upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 are formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The left side decorative substrate 2310 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 emits light from the LED mounted on the front surface, and from the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in front view in the front left movable effect unit 2300 The outer part can be decorated with light emission. Further, the left decorative body decorative substrate 2311 can emit light and decorate the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 by emitting light from the LED mounted on the front surface.

  Subsequently, the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 will be described. In the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 124A, in the normal state (when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is not energized), the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are From the vertical state, the upper end side is inclined approximately 45 degrees toward the right, and the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is advanced from the main body.

  In a normal state, the load of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 supported at the upper ends of the drive crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 causes the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 to be viewed from the front. Although the force for rotating in the clockwise direction is applied, a stopper (not shown) regulates the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 so as not to further rotate in the clockwise direction.

  From this normal state, when power is supplied to the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the plunger moves leftward in a front view, and a drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive crank 2321 rotates, the actuating link member 2322 connected by the connecting member 2323 also rotates in the same direction as the drive crank 2321. In this example, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), even when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is driven (energized) to retract the plunger, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are in the vertical state. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined to the right in front view.

  Then, when the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 are pivoted in the counterclockwise direction by the drive of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decoration supported on their upper end The body 2303 will also rotate. The upper left end of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are pivotally supported (pivoted) respectively, and therefore, when the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 rotate, When the inertial force acts on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the rotational movement is stopped, the inertial force swings around the upper end pivotally supported by the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322. It will move.

  On the other hand, when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is de-energized while the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized (the state of FIG. 124 (b)), the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is in a free state. At this time, the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 supporting the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are inclined in the right direction in a front view from the state where the upper end side is vertical Because the load is applied from the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are rotated clockwise in a front view. The force acts, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 rotate clockwise and automatically return to the position of the normal state.

  And, even when the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 return to the normal state, inertia forces act on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, respectively, and the rotational movement When is stopped, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 swing with Yura Yura.

  Therefore, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example causes the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 to swing with a slight swing by repeating energization and de-energization of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 as appropriate. Can enjoy the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, and also, by the swinging of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, the arrival of a chance etc. Can be made to suggest to people.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The gate member 2400 of the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1200 and slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the left side. Is fixed to the front of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210). The gate member 2400 has a gate portion 2401 having a width such that only one game ball can pass, and the gate sensor 2402 disposed in the gate portion 2401 detects the game ball having passed through the gate portion 2401. It can be done.

  The gate member 2400 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction as compared to the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the thickness of the game panel 1150 It is designed to fit inside. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-5. Center feature]
Subsequently, the center product 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 134. FIG. 125 is a front view of the center part, FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the center part from the front, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the center part from the rear. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of a center product disassembled into major components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the center components disassembled into major components and a back. Further, FIG. 130 is an enlarged front view showing a second attacher unit in the center product, and FIG. 131 is an explanatory view showing a movement of the second attacher unit. Further, FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the front right movable effect unit in the center character and disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the center character in the front right FIG. 134 is an explanatory drawing showing the movement of the front right movable effect unit in the center character.

  The center character 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 formed large so as to penetrate the approximate center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and the panel plate 1210 It is fixed to the front of the frame, and as shown in FIG. 108 etc., it has a large window 2501 penetrating in the back and forth direction in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100.

  The center character 2500 has a shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame which is inclined straight at a steep angle and lowered by a predetermined amount from the approximate center in the horizontal direction to the left in front view, and further gradually toward the left It has a plurality of steps in the form of slopes. On the other hand, the center accessory 2500 has an outer peripheral shape on the right side in the upper frame, which is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. The outer periphery of the right half in the front view of the center character 2500 is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  The center character 2500 has a plate-like flange 2502 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a gaming ball which has flowed forward from the flange 2502 in the game area 1100 with a boundary substantially in the lateral direction. And a peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding left and right and preventing entry of the gaming ball into the frame. In addition, the center character 2500 is opened on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 located on the front side of the panel plate 1210, and the warp entrance 2504 is made enterable by the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 (see FIG. 111). The warp outlet 2505 releases the gaming ball having entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and after rolling the gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left and right direction, into the upper gaming area 1100 of the attacker unit 2100 And a stage 2510 disposed below the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501.

  The stage 2510 in the center character 2500 has a curved shape such that both ends in the left and right direction are generally high, and a wave shape in which the position corresponding to the approximate center in the left and right direction of the game area 1100 is slightly higher Is formed. The stage 2510 is formed on the lower upper surfaces (valleys) on both sides across the middle in the left-right direction, and the guide surface 2511 and the guide surface 2511 are formed so as to spread in the left-right It has a front wall 2512 that rises lower than the outer diameter of the game ball from the front end side except for the above part, and a rear wall 2513 that rises higher than the outer diameter of the game ball from the rear end side. The game balls supplied from the warp outlet 2505 can be released to the front side (within the game area 1100) through the guiding surface 2511.

  In addition, the center character 2500 has a chance to open forward to the rear wall 2513 on the rear side with respect to the position of the apex slightly corresponding to the approximate center in the horizontal direction on the stage 2510 and the game ball can enter An entrance 2514, and a chance exit 2515 disposed immediately below the chance entrance 2514 below the chance entrance 2514 below the stage 2510 to which the gaming ball having entered the chance entrance 2514 can be released. The game ball entering the chance entrance 2514 is released from the chance exit 2515 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, the chance exit 2515 is disposed immediately above the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the gaming balls released from the chance exit 2515 have a high probability of being firstly It can be accepted (winning) to the start opening 2101.

  In this center role product 2500, substantially the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the back effect of the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the stage 2510 is visible from the player side It can be done.

  In addition, the center product 2500 includes an insertion frame-like portion 2506 that protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge side of the frame-like flange portion 2502 and is inserted into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210. And the insertion frame portion 2506 constitute a frame-shaped center main body frame 2520.

  In addition, the center character 2500 closes the window 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a transparent protection plate 2516 (see FIG. 128 etc.) disposed on the rear side of the stage 2510 and the game area 1100 (in the door frame 5). An object detection unit 2530 capable of detecting an object positioned on the front side (player side) of the glass unit 590), and a right upper portion in a width direction of the frame of the center character 2500 A logo decoration unit 2540 arranged along an arc-shaped outer periphery in a direction and showing the concept of the pachinko machine 1, a second attacker unit 2550 arranged below the logo decoration unit 2540 and to the right of the stage 2510, and a second Such as to be symmetrical with the front left movable effect unit 2300 across the middle in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 below the attacker unit 2550 Includes a front right movable direction unit 2600 disposed location, the.

  In the center character 2500, the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the right side of the approximate center in the left-right direction in front view is shaped substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the attached state, a gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed from the top of the center character 2500 to the right along the outer periphery of the logo decoration unit 2540 to the upper end of the second attachment unit 2550 By making a right strike, it is possible to easily strike the gaming ball into the second attacker unit 2550 (second game area 2551). In addition, in a state where the center character 2500 is attached to the panel board 1210, an area of a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center character 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. .

  The object detection means 2530 of the center character 2500 is an upper object detection sensor 2531 disposed on the periphery of the window 2501 substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and a left object detection disposed on the periphery on the left side in front view A sensor 2532, a right object detection sensor 2533 disposed on the periphery on the right side in a front view of the gaming window 2501, and a lower object detection sensor 2534 disposed below the right object detection sensor 2533.

  The object detection unit 2530 receives a light emitting unit that emits detection light including invisible light such as infrared light in a predetermined direction in front, and a reflected light of the detection light emitted from the light emitting unit disposed adjacent to the light emitting unit Each of the possible light receiving units is provided so that the hand or the like of the moving player can be detected within a predetermined range in front of the game area 1100. In addition, the object detection unit 2530 can detect each of the left, right, upper, and lower directions by the four object detection sensors 2531, 2523, 2533, and 2534, respectively. By the detection signals 2533 and 2534, it is possible to detect the moving direction, moving speed and the like of the hand or the like. In addition, the object detection means 2530 can perform the effect which a player can participate by operating at the time of the effect performed by the start winning, and provides an effect having a sense of unity with the player to further enjoy the player It is supposed to be

  The object detection means 2530 enables detection of each of the object detection sensors 2531, 2523 and 2533 at the time of a predetermined gaming state, and causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to move a hand in front of the game area 1100 in a predetermined direction. The effect image for prompting the player is displayed, and the player is given an opportunity to perform a predetermined effect by detecting the hand moved by the player in front of the game area 1100, and the player is made to participate in the effect of the game. It is intended to enhance interest.

  Although the logo decoration unit 2540 of the center character 2500 is not shown in detail, it is disposed on the back side of a logo lens which has a light transmitting property and is three-dimensionally shaped so that logo letters are lifted. A center lens 2500 includes a diffusion lens member having a plurality of prismatic lenses, and a transparent logo unit base disposed behind the diffusion lens member and supporting the logo lens and the diffusion lens member. It is attached to the front side of the frame-like center main body frame 2520. In addition, the center character 2500 is attached to the back side of the center body frame 2520 at a position corresponding to the logo decoration unit 2540, and a logo decoration board 2541 on which a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) are mounted And a substrate cover 2542 covering the rear side of the substrate.

[2-5A. Second Attack Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2550 in the center character 2500 will be described. The second attacher unit 2550 of the center product 2500 is disposed below the logo decoration unit 2540 at a position adjacent to the lower side of the right side of the window 2501 in a front view. The second attacher unit 2550 has a second game area 2551 and a second game area in which gaming balls having flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side of the front wall of the peripheral wall 2503 on the front side of the center body frame 2520 can be distributed. The second large winning opening 2552 which is disposed at a predetermined position in 2551 and can receive the game ball, the second opening and closing member 2553 which makes the second large winning opening 2552 openable, and the second opening and closing member 2553 And a second attachment driving mechanism 2560 which is turned according to the state to enable or disable reception of the game ball into the second large winning opening 2552.

  Further, the second attacher unit 2550 of the center character 2500 divides the rear end of the second game area 2551 and is formed substantially flush with the flange portion 2502 of the center main body frame 2520 and proceeds from the flange portion 2502 to the window portion 2501 The gaming ball received in the second large winning opening 2552 can be opened in the front-rear direction at a position downstream of the second large winning opening 2552 in the plate-like rear end wall 2554 and the second large winning opening 2552 in the rear end wall The second outlet sensor 2556 for detecting the game ball received by the second discharge hole 2555, the second big winning hole 2552, and a transparent circulation that makes it possible to guide the flow of the game ball in the second game area 2551. A guide member 2570 and a second attachment cover 2557 attached to the front of the flow guide member 2570 and having a predetermined decoration are provided.

  As illustrated, the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attachment unit 2550 is rotatably supported at its proximal end on an axis extending in the front-rear direction and its distal end is a free end, and the width increases toward the distal end Is formed in a vane shape (shape similar to the cross-sectional shape of a wing of an airplane or the like). When the second opening / closing member 2553 is in a substantially vertically rising state with the base end side on the lower side, the second large winning opening 2552 can be closed (closed state), and the state is laid substantially horizontally. Then, the second large winning opening 2552 can be opened (opened). Further, the second opening / closing member 2553 is provided with a pair of engagement protrusions 2553a that project rearward from the rear surface on the proximal end side, and the drive from the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 is transmitted through these engagement protrusions 2553a. It is possible to rotate by turning.

  In addition, the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 of the second attachment unit 2550 is disposed on the rear side of the rear end wall 2554, and as shown in FIG. 131, a second attachment solenoid 2561 having a plunger advancing and retracting in the left and right direction. And a rotation transmission piece 2562 for rotating the second opening / closing member 2553 by transmitting the advancing / retracting drive of the plunger in the second attachment solenoid 2561 to the engagement projection 2553a of the second opening / closing member 2553; And a bracket 2563 that supports the second attachment solenoid 2561 and is attached to the rear side of the center body frame 2520.

  The second attachment solenoid 2561 of the second attachment drive mechanism 2560 is supported by the bracket 2563 such that the plunger moves forward and backward from the left side in a front view. Further, the rotation transmitting piece 2562 of the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 is rotatably supported by the bracket 2563 at the upper position on the upper side of the portion where the plunger of the second attachment solenoid 2561 advances and retracts, and the second attachment The lower end side extending downward from the solenoid 2561 is inserted between the pair of engagement protrusions 2553a of the second opening and closing member 2553, and the second attachment solenoid 2561 at a substantially middle portion in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). It is connected to the tip of the plunger.

  Thereby, when the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 advances and retracts the plunger by the second attachment unit 2561, the turning transmission piece 2562 turns about the upper end, and the lower end of the turning transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape . Then, when the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape, the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 abuts on either of the pair of engagement projections 2553a in the second opening / closing member 2553 and the engagement projection 2553a in contact When the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 is pushed in the moving direction, the second opening / closing member 2553 is rotated.

  In this example, when the second opening and closing member 2553 is raised, that is, when the second large winning opening 2552 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. Of the second attachment solenoid 2561 is in the forward position. Further, in a state where the second opening and closing member 2553 is laid down, that is, when the second large winning opening 2552 is opened, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the rotation transmission piece 2562 is counterclockwise in front view. The plunger of the second attachment solenoid 2561 is in the retracted position, as it is rotated by a predetermined angle (about 15 degrees) in the direction of.

  The distribution guide member 2570 of the second attack unit 2550 forms a plurality of flow paths through which the game balls can flow in the second game area 2551, and the game balls not accepted by the second large winning opening 2552 It can be released into 1100. As shown in FIG. 130, the flow guiding member 2570 is provided with an area entry port 2571, into which the gaming balls having flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side of the peripheral wall 2503 enter, and A crank-shaped decelerating flow path 2572 for decelerating the speed and gaming balls supplied from the decelerating flow path 2572 are formed so that the left end side is lowered in front view and the gaming ball is rolled leftward A shelf-shaped branch guide shelf 2573, a first branch port 2574 which opens downward with a predetermined width through which gaming balls can pass from the left end of the branch guide rack 2573 and which can communicate with the second big winning port 2552; A second branch port 2575 is opened toward the branch guide shelf 2573 on the left side of 2574 so that the game ball can pass and does not communicate with the second large winning opening 2552.

  In addition, the distribution guide member 2570 is a shelf-shaped branch port shelf 2576 inclined so that the right end is lowered in the front direction from the vicinity of the lower end of the second branch port 2575 and the front surface of the second large winning opening 2552 The second open / close member 2553 is pivotable wide on the right side so that the game ball entering the first branch port 2574 can be distributed, and the second large winning opening 2552 is disposed below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576 First channel 2577, a first discharge port 2578 which is open at the downstream end of the first channel 2577 and can release gaming balls into the game area 1100, and a second large winning opening 2552 disposed in the first channel 2577 And the discharge port 2555, the second flow path 2580 through which the gaming balls having entered the second branch 2575 flow, and the second flow path 2580 open at the downstream end of the second flow path 2580 to play the game ball Release into 1100 It includes a second outlet 2581, the.

  The first branch 2574 of the distribution guide member 2570 has the right end as the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573 and the left end as the left end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the opening width (width in the left-right direction) is the game It is considered to be two to three times as large as the outer diameter of the ball. In addition, the second branch 2575 of the distribution guide member 2570 has a size such that the size of the opening is slightly larger (for example, 0.5 mm to 1 mm) than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In comparison, it is difficult for the game ball to enter. In addition, the second branch port 2575 is disposed so that the lower end thereof is located slightly above the upper surface of the branch port shelf 2576, and is disposed so as to form a step with the branch port shelf 2576. Therefore, even if the game ball rolls on the branch opening shelf 2576 toward the second branch opening 2575, the game ball does not easily enter the second branch opening 2575 by coming into contact with the step.

  The branch port shelf 2576 of the distribution guide member 2570 is formed shorter than the width of the first branch port 3574, and the lower end of the right end in the front view is the upper end of the second large winning port 2552. Further, in the first flow path 2577 of the flow guiding member 2570, the second opening and closing member 2553 is rotatably disposed at a position substantially directly below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the second opening and closing member 2553 is clockwise. The first discharge port 2578 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2553 when it is turned to lie in the direction of (2) and the second large winning opening 2552 is open. That is, when the second large winning opening 2552 is in the open state, the gaming ball having entered the first branch opening 2574 is guided by the second opening and closing member 2553 to the second large winning opening 2552 and is not discharged from the first discharge opening 2578 It is supposed to be.

  In this example, the distribution guide member 2570 and a part of the second attachment cover 2557 are formed transparent so that the inside of the second game area 2551 can be viewed from the outside (the player side). ing. Further, in the present example, the second count sensor 2556 is disposed on the upstream side of the discharge port 2555 in the large inlet flow path 2579 of the flow guiding member 2570.

  The second attacher unit 2550 of this example causes the gaming ball having flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side of the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500 to be decelerated once in the deceleration flow path 2572 and then rotated left by the branch guide shelf 2573 It is designed to guide you. Then, in the second attacker unit 2550, a first branch port 2574 that can communicate with the second large winning port 2552 and a second branch port 2575 that does not communicate with the second large winning port 2552 are opened on the left side of the branch guide shelf 2573. The player can be harassing and pounding, and the player can be entertained, because the game ball rolled and released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters which branch port 2574, 2575. It has become.

  When the gaming ball discharged from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the second branch port 2575, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the second outlet 2581 through the second flow path 2580. As described above, since the size of the second branch 2575 is only slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, the game balls released from the branch guide shelf 2573 are almost all to the second branch 2575. It does not enter, and enters into the first branch 2574.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the first branch port 2574, it is sent to the first flow path 2577. Then, when the second opening and closing member 2553 rises and the second large winning opening 2552 is in the closed state, the gaming ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is not received by the second large winning opening 2552 at the lower end. It is discharged into the game area 1100 from the opened first discharge port 2578. On the other hand, when the second opening and closing member 2553 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front and the second large winning opening 2552 is in the open state, the gaming ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is opened and closed secondly. It is guided to the upper surface of the member 2553 and accepted to the second large winning opening 2552, and is circulated through the large inlet flow path 2579 and detected by the second count sensor 2556 before being discharged out of the game area 1100, 2551 from the outlet 2555 It will be. Further, when the second opening and closing member 2553 is in the open position, the first outlet 2578 is closed by the second opening and closing member 2553. Therefore, the second opening and closing member 2553 is sent to the first channel 2577 through the first branch 2574 A game ball is to be accepted in the second big winning opening 2552. In addition, depending on the timing at which the second opening and closing member 2553 performs the opening and closing operation, even if the gaming ball enters the first branch port 2574, it is not accepted to the second large winning opening 2552, and the game area 1100 from the first outlet 2578 May be released inwards.

  Thus, according to the second attacher unit 2550 of the center character 2500, when the second opening / closing member 2553 is pivoted to the open position and the second large winning opening 2552 is opened, the peripheral wall of the center character 2500 When the game ball enters between the outer periphery on the right side of the unit 2503 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, the game ball is received to the second large winning opening 2552 through the first branch 2574 and the first flow path 2577. The game ball can be made to win the second large winning opening 2552 by such a hitting operation, and even a player who is not used to the pachinko machine 1 can easily enjoy it.

  Also, according to the second attacker unit 2550, in the second game area 2551 where the second large winning opening 2552 is disposed, the gaming ball is guided by the wall-like flow path by the distribution guide member 2570, Since the game ball is not guided by the nail, the guiding direction of the game ball changes when the obstacle nail is inclined due to the contact of the game ball, etc., and the acceptance probability to the second big winning hole 2552 changes. It is possible to certainly avoid the problem, to maintain the initial state over a long period of time, and to allow the player to be fully entertained.

[2-5B. Front right movable effect unit]
Subsequently, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center role 2500 will be described. The front right movable effect unit 2600 of the center character 2500 is disposed at a position symmetrical to the front left movable effect unit 2300 across the center of the gaming area 1100 in the lower side of the second attachment unit 2550. The front left movable effect unit 2300 has a substantially symmetrical shape. This front right movable effect unit 2600 is a shallow box-shaped unit in which one side in a front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 and the outer shape in a front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape and the front side is opened. A main body 2601, a lower right first decorative body 2602 disposed in the unit main body 2601 and rotatably supported at the upper end side and formed into a shape imitating a lantern, and a front view right side of the lower right first decorative body 2602 A lower right second decorative body 2603 which is disposed in the unit main body 2601 and rotatably supported at the upper end side and shaped like a lantern in a smaller shape than the lower right first decorative body 2602, and a lower right second decoration The body 2603 and the lower right first decorative body 2602 are movably supported within a predetermined range, and the movable support mechanism 2620 disposed on the rear side of the unit body 2601 and the right via the movable support mechanism 2620 A lower right side drive solenoid 2630 for moving and driving the first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 and a lower right side drive solenoid 2630 are mounted on the rear side of the unit body 2601 and the unit, And a unit base 2604 supporting the movable support mechanism 2620 in cooperation with the main body 2601.

  Further, the front right movable effect unit 2600 is provided with a left base plate 2606 mounted on the front side of the unit base 2604 so as to extend leftward from near the rear end on the left side in a front view of the unit body 2601; A plate-shaped decorative member 2607 attached to the right corner, a front upper decorative member 2608 attached to the front end of the upper side of the unit body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration, and a front attached to the lower corner of the unit body 2601 and having the predetermined decoration A lower decoration member 2609 is provided.

  Furthermore, the front right movable effect unit 2600 is attached to the front of the unit base 2604 on the rear side of the unit body 2601 and on the front side a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and on the rear side of the unit body 2601 And a right decoration body decoration substrate 2611 disposed on the front side of the decoration substrate 2610 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2604 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Reference numeral 2612 in the figure is a head cover for protecting the tip of the advancing and retracting plunger in the lower right side drive solenoid 2630. The lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is attached to the unit base 2604 so that the plunger can advance and retract in the left and right direction from the left side in a front view.

  The unit main body 2601 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed so that the upper surface formed in a box shape becomes lower toward the left in front view, and the inside of the second game area 2551 in the second attacker unit 2550 , And is a shelf 2601 a capable of guiding the gaming ball discharged from the first outlet 2578 or the second outlet 2581 to the center side in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100. Also, the unit body 2601 has three-dimensional irregularities formed on the bottom surface (surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface is formed to have translucency There is. In the unit body 2601, an opening 2601 b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603. The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 disposed on the front side through the opening 2601 b of the unit body 2601 and the movable support mechanism 2620 are connected to each other.

  The movable support mechanism 2620 of the front right movable presentation unit 2600 is, as illustrated, rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2601 and the unit base 2604 at the lower end side, and the upper end side is the lower right The drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 at the approximate center of the longitudinal direction and the right side of the drive crank 2621 in a bowl shape rotatably supporting the first decorative body 2602 The lower end side is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2601 and the unit base 2604, and the upper end side rotatably supports the lower right second decoration 2603. 2622 and the actuating link member 2622 operate so as to extend substantially parallel to the drive crank 2621 And a, a connecting member 2623 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2621 of link member 2622.

  The drive crank 2621 of the movable support mechanism 2620 is configured to support and connect the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the connecting member 2623 with one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, similarly to the drive crank 2621, the lower right second decorative body 2603 and the connecting member 2623 are supported and connected by one shaft member on the upper end side of the actuating link member 2622 as well. Further, the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 are formed such that the distance between the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decorative members 2602 and 2603 is the same. When the drive crank 2621 is rotated by the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the movable support mechanism 2620 rotates so that the actuating link member 2622 is always parallel to the drive crank 2621 via the connection member 2623. ing.

  As illustrated, in the present example, the connecting member 2623 is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the front right movable presentation unit 2600 is equipped with the stopper which regulates the rotation range of the drive crank 2621.

  The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 are each formed in a shape imitating a lantern, as shown in the figure, and formed in a plate shape. In addition, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are formed to have translucency. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, in the state where the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are assembled as the front right movable effect unit 2600, the lower right first decorative body 2602 is the lower right first decorative body 2602. It is positioned in front of the two decorations 2603 so that when the lower right first decoration 2602 and the lower right second decoration 2603 are shaken by driving the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, they do not contact each other. It has become.

  The right base plate 2306 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed to have translucency. The right side decorative substrate 2610 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 emits the LED mounted on the front surface, whereby the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body in front view in the front right movable effect unit 2600 A portion outside of 2603 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the right decoration body decoration substrate 2611 can emit light and decorate the lower right first decoration body 2602 and the lower right second decoration body 2603 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  In the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center product 2500 of this example, the upper portion of the unit base 2604 is attached to the rear side of the center main body frame 2520.

  Subsequently, the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 will be described. In the front right movable effect unit 2600 of this example, as shown in FIG. 134A, in the normal state (when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is not energized), the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are The upper end side is inclined approximately 45 degrees toward the left direction from the vertical state, and the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is advanced from the main body.

  In a normal state, the load of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 supported on the upper ends of the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 makes the driving crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 face front. Although the force to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by sight is applied, the stopper (not shown) restricts the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 not to rotate in the counterclockwise direction any more. There is.

  From this normal state, when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized, the plunger moves rightward as viewed from the front, and the drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction Will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the drive crank 2621 rotates, the actuating link member 2622 connected by the connecting member 2623 also rotates in the same direction as the drive crank 2621. In this example, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), even when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is driven (energized) to retract the plunger, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are in the vertical state. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined to the left in front view.

  Then, when the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 rotate in the clockwise direction by a predetermined range by the drive of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the lower right first decorative body 2602 supported at the upper end thereof and the lower right first one The second decoration 2603 is also rotated. Since the upper end of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are rotatably supported (pivoted), the rotational movement of the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 is accompanied by the rotational movement. Then, when the inertial force acts on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 and the rotational movement stops, the upper end centered on the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 is centered by the inertial force. It will swing with Yura Yura.

  On the other hand, when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is deenergized while the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized (state of FIG. 134 (b)), the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 becomes free. . At this time, the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 supporting the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are inclined in the left direction in a front view from the state where the upper end side is vertical Since it is in the state, the load acting from the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 causes the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 to be counterclockwise when viewed from the front respectively As a result, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 rotate in the counterclockwise direction and return to the position of the normal state automatically. It will be done.

  Then, even when the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 return to the normal state, inertia forces act on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. When the rotational movement is stopped, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 will oscillate with Yura Yura.

  Therefore, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center character 2500 of the present example repeats the energization and deenergization of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 appropriately to lower right first decorative body 2602 and lower right second decoration. The body 2603 can be swung with the head and the movement of the lower right first decoration 2602 and the lower right second decoration 2603 can be enjoyed, and the lower right first decoration 2602 and the lower right second decoration The swing of the body 2603 enables the player to indicate the arrival of a chance or the like.

[2-6. Overall configuration of back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back unit in the game board, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the back is there.

  The back unit 300 of this example is a box-like unit attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and the back wall 3001 b has an opening 3001 c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display 1900. A back upper left decorative unit 3050 which is disposed in the front view left corner above the opening 3001c near the front in the box 3001 and can be lighted and decorated according to the game state, and below the opening 3001c near the front in the back box 3001 A ball which is disposed on the side and guides the gaming ball received by the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and the second big winning opening 2552 of the center role 2500 to a predetermined position below. It is attached to the front side of the back wall 3001b of the induction unit 3060 and the back box 3001 and the opening 300 according to the game state. The back inside movable effect unit 3100 which closes a part of c, the back up back movable effect unit 3200 which is disposed on the upper side and the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000 and which moves according to the game state A back upper front movable effect unit 3400 disposed on the front side of the upper back movable effect unit 3200 and movable according to the gaming state, and disposed between the ball guiding unit 3060 and the back movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000 Back and back movable production unit 3500 movable according to the state, back lower front movable presentation unit 3600 attached to the front side of the ball guidance unit 3060 and movable according to the gaming state, and on the left side of the opening 3001 c of the back box 3000 A back left movable effect unit 3700 which is disposed on the front side of the movable effect unit 3100 during the back movement and is movable according to the gaming state. To have.

  In addition, back unit 3000 is a horizontally long back lower substrate base 3010 attached near the lower end of the back surface of back wall 3001 b of back box 3001, a panel relay substrate 3011 attached to the back side of back lower substrate base 3010, and the back box A plate-like horizontally long back middle substrate base 3012 rotatably mounted along the lower side of the opening 3001 c on the back surface of the back wall 3001 b of the 3001, a lamp driving substrate 3013 mounted on the back surface of the middle middle substrate base 3012, and a back box In the rear right side of the opening 3001c of the rear wall 3001b of the back wall 3001b, a vertically long rectangular back right substrate base 3014 attached, a motor drive substrate 3015 attached to the back side of the back right substrate base 3014, and a back box 3001 A laterally elongated plate-shaped back mounted on the upper side of the opening 3001c at the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b A substrate base 3016, and a back on the rear relay board 3017 attached to the rear side of the back substrate base 3016, a.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the right side surface of the shallow box-like back upper left substrate base 3018 attached to the upper left corner in the front view in the back box 3001 and opened rightward, and the back left attached to the right side of the back upper left substrate base 3018 A relay substrate 3019 and a vertically extending wiring support member 3020 attached near the front end of the right side surface in the back box 3001 are provided.

  Although not shown, back unit 3000 is attached to the rear of back box 3001 at the center of the opening 3001c in the rear view and at the approximate center in the vertical direction, and the liquid crystal display 1900 is detached from the back of back box 3001. A locking member is provided for possible retention.

  The back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will not be described in detail, but the back upper left decoration unit 3050, the ball guiding unit 3060, the back inside movable effect unit 3100, the back up back movable effect unit 3200, the back top The front movable effect unit 3400, the back and back movable effect unit 3500, the back and front movable effect unit 3600, the back left movable effect unit 3700, the substrate bases 3010, 3012, 3014, 3016, and 3018, the wiring support member 3020, etc. It has mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting.

  Further, the back box 3001 is provided with a flange-like fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. Further, as shown in FIG. 139 etc., the back box 3001 has a fixed frame piece 3001 d that extends in a frame shape rearward at a position outside a predetermined width from the periphery of the opening 3001 c on the rear surface side of the back wall 3001 b The liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the fixed frame piece 3001 d from the rear side. The insertion recess is formed at a predetermined position of 3001 d and into which the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted.

[2-7. Back upper left decoration unit]
Subsequently, the back upper left decoration unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the back upper left decorative unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is disposed near the front end of the upper left in the front view of the back box 3001 and has its upper end attached to the upper front edge of the back box 3001 The lower end is attached to the upper portion of the back left movable effect unit 3700 described later. The back upper left decorative unit 3050 is a shallow box-shaped translucent upper left decorative member 3051 which is decorated on the front and opened at the rear, and a base member 3052 which closes the rear end of the back upper left decorative member 3051. And a rear upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted on the front side of the base member 3052 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The back upper left decoration unit 3050 is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 formed in a substantially circular shape, and the LED of the back upper left decoration substrate provided inside is made to emit light. The upper left decorative member 3051 can be appropriately illuminated and colored in color. By making the back upper left decorative member 3051 emit light in a plane, the corresponding portion of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 can be brightly decorated. It is possible to display the inside of the game area 1100 brighter to make the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable.

[2-8. Ball guidance unit]
Next, the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and FIG. FIG. 140 is a front perspective view of the ball guiding unit in the back unit, and FIG. 141 is a rear perspective view of the ball guiding unit. The ball guiding unit 3060 of this example is disposed at the front end in the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 and at a position lower than the opening 3001 c, and in the state assembled to the game board 4, the back side of the center character 2500. In the lower part of the stage 2510. In addition, the ball guidance unit 3060 is a game ball received by the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of the attacking unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, and a second winning opening of the second attacking unit 2550 in the center character 2500. It is possible to receive the gaming ball received by the 2552 and to be guided and discharged downward.

  The ball guiding unit 3060 includes a unit base 3061 attached to the lower end of the front end of the back box 3001 and extending in the left and right direction, and an under-stage decoration substrate 3062 attached to the upper front of the unit base 3061 A transparent substrate cover 3063 covering the front surface of the under-stage decorative substrate 3062; a lower-stage left decorative member 3064 and a lower-stage right decorative member 3065 attached to the front of the unit base 3061 along the lower edge of the substrate cover 3063; Is equipped.

  As shown in the figure, the upper end of the unit base 3061 is formed in a loose V shape such that the center in the left-right direction is lower, as shown in the figure. It is formed in a loose V shape along the upper end of the base 3061. A unit base 3061 of the ball guiding unit 3060 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction, and is a passage hole through which the gaming ball received by the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and guided backward by the hook 2110b can pass. 3061a, a general discharge passage 3061b which is received by the general winning opening 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 and receives the game ball guided to the rear by the hook portion 2110b and guides it downward, and a second winning opening 2552 in the center character 2500 And a second discharge passage 3061c for receiving the game ball guided from the discharge port 2555 to the rear of the center character 2500 and guiding the game ball downward.

  The general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 is formed at a position corresponding to the four general winning openings 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, respectively, and the gaming balls received in the two adjacent general winning openings 2104 are separately provided. It is formed to be merged after receiving and discharged downward from one place. The general discharge passage 3061b is open at the front side, and the front end side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100 and the rear surface of the panel plate 1210 so that the game balls do not fall forward. .

  In addition, after the second discharge passage 3061c of the unit base 3061 receives the game ball from the second large winning opening 2552 at the upper part of the unit base 3061, it is guided to the vicinity of the lower part of the unit base 3061 at the front side of the unit base 3061 The unit base 3061 is guided to the rear side of the unit base 3061 through the opening passing through the unit base 3061, and further guided to a position near the center in the lateral direction on the rear side of the unit base 3061 and discharged downward. The second discharge passage 3061 c is configured such that the front side is open on the front side of the unit base 3061, and the front end side is closed by a plate-like second discharge passage cover 3066.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 is further provided with a first discharge passage member 3067 which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3061 and guides and discharges the gaming ball having passed through the passage hole 3061a of the unit base 3061 downward. Although not shown, the first discharge passage member 3067 is open at the front, and the front end is closed by the rear surface of the unit base 3061. Further, the first discharge passage member 3067 is formed to guide the gaming ball having passed through the passage hole 3061a from the front side to the lower left direction in rear view and discharge it downward from the position adjacent to the second discharge passage 3061c. .

  Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 includes a back lower left relay substrate 3068 attached to the front end of the unit base 3061 and a back lower right relay substrate 3069 attached to the front end of the unit base 3061.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 is attached to a predetermined position of the first discharge passage member 3067 and detects the gaming ball received by the first start hole 2101; a general discharge passage 3061c in the unit base 3061 General winning opening sensor 3071 for detecting gaming balls attached to the predetermined winning position of the general winning opening 2104 and for detecting magnetism by being attached at a position adjacent to the passage hole 3061a at the center in the horizontal direction in the unit base 3061 And a magnetic detection sensor 3072.

  There are four general winning opening sensors 3071 in the ball guiding unit 3060 in this example, and for the general winning opening 2104 arranged at a position near the big winning opening 2103 on both left and right sides of the attacker unit 2100, For the general winning opening 2104 arranged to be detected only by the general winning opening sensor 3071 in the discharging passage 3061a and located at a position far from the big winning opening 2103, two of the two in the general discharging passage 3061a. A general winning opening sensor 3071 is detected. This makes it possible to know which general winning opening 2104 the gaming ball has been accepted.

  In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 3072 of the ball guidance unit 3060 can detect the magnetism that acts on the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like.

  The gaming balls guided downward by the general discharge passage 3061b, the second discharge passage 3061c, and the first discharge passage member 3067 of the ball guiding unit 3060 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and the substrate holder 1160 It is discharged to the lower part of the game board 4 from the out ball discharge part 1161 of the. In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 can emit light and decorate the stage 2510 in the center character 2500 by causing the LED mounted on the under-stage decoration substrate 3062 to emit light.

[2-9. Back-to-back movable production unit]
Subsequently, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 153. FIG. 142 is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit It is. Further, FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is a back-to-back dismount of the back-to-back movable effect unit into main members. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 147 is a front perspective view of the back inside drive mechanism of the back inside movable effect unit, and FIG. 148 is a back perspective view of the back inside drive mechanism of the back inside movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back-back drive mechanism disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a back-back disassemble of the back-back drive mechanisms into main members. It is a perspective view. Further, FIG. 151 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect unit during the back.

  The back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is mounted on the front side of the back wall 3001 b so as to close the opening 3001 c from the front side in the back box 3001. The back inside movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front of the back wall 3001 b of the back box 3001 and has an opening window 3101 a which has substantially the same size as the opening 3001 c and which penetrates in the front and rear direction. A vertically elongated rectangular left door member 3120L and a right door member 3120R disposed on the front side of the back middle unit base 3101 and the back middle unit base 3101 and formed vertically higher than the height of the opening window 3101a, and left door member 3120L The right door member 3120R is moved in the lateral direction between the position outside the opening window 3101a and the position on the front side of the opening window 3101a according to the game state, and the unit base 3101 is below the opening window 3101a in the back And a back middle drive mechanism 3150 attached to the front side.

  Further, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the upper front surface of the back middle unit base 3101 and restricts the upper ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120 R from moving forward, to substantially the entire width of the back middle unit base 3101 It is attached along the lower end of the opening window 3101a in the back unit base 3101 at the front of the left back member 3120L and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, and extends back to the back unit base member. A plate-like back-and-bottom lower decoration member 3103 extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of 3101 and a back-to-back upper decoration member 3102 disposed on the right side of the opening window 3101 a A plate-shaped back front right decoration member 3104 attached to the front of the lower decoration member 3103 and a left door member 3120 L The back side is attached to the left front of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 and has substantially the same height as the opening window 3101 a, and the back inside middle back decoration member 3105 and the right door member 3120R. A plate-shaped back middle right decoration member 3106 is provided at the right front of the opening window 3101 a of the unit base 3101 and has substantially the same height as the opening window 3101 a.

  Furthermore, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 has a position detection sensor attached to the lower side of the opening window 3101a at the rear of the back-to-back unit base 3101 and capable of detecting the moving position of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. The back middle relay board 3108 and a board cover 3109 which covers the back surface of the back middle relay board 3108 and is attached to the back side of the unit base 3101 during the back side are provided. The back middle relay board 3108 relays the connection between the position detection sensor 3108 a, the door decoration board 3125, the left door drive motor 3161, the right door drive motor 3181 and the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015. It is. In addition, as shown in FIG. 145, the back surface relay board 3108 is provided with a position detection sensor 3108a, and the position detection sensor 3108a causes the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R respectively to the left of the opening window 3101a. And, it is arranged to be able to detect that the retracted position located on the right side and the central appearance position where the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are in contact with each other at the approximate center in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the code | symbol 3110 in a figure is a wiring clamp for fixing the wiring which connects the door decoration board | substrate 3125 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R which abbreviate | omitted illustration, and the middle back relay board 3108.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 are formed in a form imitating an eyebrow, and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are formed in substantially symmetrical shapes relative to each other. ing. The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are formed on the rear side of the frame 3121 and a frame 3121 in which both left and right sides extend up and down with respect to a vertically long rectangular frame shape imitating a soft fold of a brow. A transparent plate-like door main body 3122 disposed, a movable base 3123 attached to the lower end of the door main body 3122 and guided and driven in the left-right direction by the back middle drive mechanism 3150, and a rear unit base mounted to the upper end of the door main body 3122 An upper guide member 3124 slidably guided between the rear wall and the back inner upper decoration member 3102 of 3101, and a through hole disposed on the rear side of the door main body 3122 and corresponding to the central opening in the frame 3121 The door decoration substrate 3125 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side and the door decoration substrate 3125 is formed in substantially the same shape, and between the door decoration substrate 3125 and the door body 3122 Light guide member for guiding light to the frame body from the LED in location to the door decorated substrate 3125 (not shown) is provided with a.

  In the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, the plate-like door main body 3122 is formed transparent, and the members disposed on the rear side through the vertically elongated rectangular opening formed at the center of the frame 3121 Members and the liquid crystal display device 1900 etc.) can be visually recognized. In addition, by making the LED of the door decoration substrate 3125 emit light, the frame body 3121 can be decorated to emit light.

  The movable base 3123 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R penetrates in the left-right direction and into which the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is inserted, and the drive belt 3165 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 A belt fixing portion 3123 b fixed to 3185 and a detection piece 3123 c which can be detected by a position detection sensor provided on the relay substrate 3108 extending backward to the back are provided.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are slidably guided in the lateral direction by the rail shaft 3152 by inserting the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 into the guide hole 3123a of the movable base 3123. It has become. Further, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left-right direction at the same position in the front-rear direction by one rail shaft 3151 so that the mutually facing sides are in contact with each other. This makes it possible to form one big surface. In addition, as described above, since the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left and right direction by one rail shaft 3151, they can not overlap with each other in the front and rear direction or can not pass through each other. There is.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the back inside drive mechanism 3150 of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 is a long rail shaft which slidably guides the lower ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left and right direction. 3151 and a main body base 3152 which supports both ends of the rail shaft 3151 and is formed by bending a metal plate. The rail shaft 3151 in the back-middle drive mechanism 3150 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The body base 3152 of the driving mechanism 3150 in the back has a substantially U-shaped cross section whose front is open and extends in the left and right direction from the upper ends of the body 3152a and ends of the rail shaft 3151 A rail support piece 3152b to be supported and a fixing piece 3152c extending forward from both lower ends of the main body 3152a are provided. Further, in the main body base 3152, mounting holes, openings and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 penetrates the plate-like left base 3160 fixed to the upper side of the fixed piece 3152 c on the left side in a front view of the main body base 3152 and the left base 3160 from the lower side A left door drive motor 3161 mounted on the lower side of the left fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152, a left drive gear 3162 fixed to the rotation shaft of the left drive motor 3161, and a driven gear 3163a engaged with the left drive gear 3162 , And a drive pulley 3163b that integrally rotates on the lower side of the driven gear 3163a, and the left drive rotor 3163 rotatably supported by the left base 3160 and the body base 3152 and the same as the drive pulley 3163b in the left drive rotor 3163 At the height, on the left side of the fixing piece 3152 c on the right side of the body base 3152 The left driven pulley 3164 is placed, the left drive belt 3165 wound around the left driven pulley 3164 and the drive pulley 3163 b of the left drive rotating body 3163, and the left driven pulley 3164 is rotatably supported and Between the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley supporting member 3166. The pulley supporting member 3166 is mounted slidably in the lateral direction, and the spring fixing member 3167 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the left side of the pulley supporting member 3166 And a tension spring 3168 for biasing the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley support member 3166 away from each other, and a gear cover 3169 attached to the upper side of the left base 3160 and covering the upper side of the left drive gear 3162; Is equipped.

  Furthermore, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 penetrates the plate-like right base 3180 fixed to the upper side of the fixed piece 3152 c on the right side in a front view of the main body base 3152 and the right base 3180 from the lower side A right door drive motor 3181 attached to the lower side of the right fixing piece 3152c in the extension main body base 3152, a right drive gear 3182 fixed to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3181 and a driven gear 3183a engaged with the right drive gear 3182 And a drive pulley 3183b integrally rotating on the upper side of the driven gear 3183a, the right drive rotor 3183 rotatably supported by the right base 3180 and the body base 3152 and the same height as the drive pulley 3183b in the right drive rotor 3183 On the right of the left fixing piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 The right driven pulley 3184, the right drive belt 3185 wound around the right driven pulley 3184 and the drive pulley 3183 b of the right drive rotating body 3183, and the right driven pulley 3184 are rotatably supported with respect to the main body base 3152. Between the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley supporting member 3186. The pulley supporting member 3186 is mounted slidably in the lateral direction, and the spring fixing member 3187 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the right side of the pulley supporting member 3186 A tension spring 3188 disposed on the right side and urging the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley supporting member 3186 away from each other, and a gear cover 3189 attached to the upper side of the right base 3180 and covering the upper side of the right drive gear 3182; Is equipped.

  As shown in the figure, in the back-middle drive mechanism 3150, the right drive belt 3185 is disposed above the left drive belt 3165. Further, in the back-rear driving mechanism 3150, the belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 of the left door member 3120L is fixed to a portion positioned on the front side of the left driving belt 3165 rotated by the driving pulley 3163b and the left driven pulley 3164. The belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 of the right door member 3120R is fixed to a portion located on the front side of the right driving belt 3185 which is circulated by the driving pulley 3183b and the right driven pulley 3184 (see FIG. 143 etc.) ).

  In addition, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is further attached to a predetermined position of the main body 3152 a in the main body base 3152 and further provided with a protection member 3153 for preventing the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 from coming into contact with the main body base 3152 ing. The protective member 3153 is vertically semi-cylindrical and extends forward and backward, and a portion projecting forward is attached so as to project forward from the vertically extending surface of the main body 3152 a of the main body base 3152, and the left drive When the belt 3165 or the right drive belt 3185 is bent, it comes in line contact earlier than the main body base 3152 and the left drive belt 3165 or the right drive belt 3185 comes in surface contact with the main body base 3152 Thus, it is possible to prevent early wear of the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185.

  By driving the left drive belt 3165 to rotate by means of the left door drive motor 3161, the entire back door drive mechanism 3150 is moved to the left from the front end left end of the opening window 3101a in the back unit base 3101. It is possible to move in the left-right direction between the retracted position located and the maximum appearance position where the right end of the left door member 3120L is located slightly leftward from the right end of the opening window 3101a. Further, by driving the right drive belt 3185 to rotate the right drive belt 3185 by the right door drive motor 3181 in the back middle drive mechanism 3150, the entire right door member 3120R is made to the right from the front end right end of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101. Can be moved in the left-right direction between the retracted position where the rear door 3120 is located and the maximum appearance position where the left end of the right door member 3120R is positioned slightly to the right of the left end of the opening window 3101a.

  Next, the movement of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 of this example will be described. The back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 can move the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left-right direction by rotationally driving the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 according to the game state. It is supposed to be. In the normal state, the movable medium producing unit 3100 is in the retracted position where the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are positioned on the left side and the right side in front view of the opening window 3101a in the unit base 3101 during the reverse side. I'm getting tired. In the state of this retracted position, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are positioned outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and do not block the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display means 1900. (See FIG. 108 etc.). In the retracted position, the left door member 3120L is positioned just behind the back left movable effect unit 3700 described later, and the right door member 3120R is positioned just behind the right front decorative member 3104 in the middle, and the right The door member 3120R is hardly visible to the player.

  With the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the retracted position, respectively, the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 rotate when the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 are appropriately rotated. And the left door member 3120L moves in the right direction, and the right door member 3120R moves in the left direction. When the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move in the right and left directions, respectively, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is gradually blocked from the left and right by the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, and the display area is gradually narrowed. It is possible to perform such a movable effect. Then, when the right end of the left door member 3120L and the left end of the right door member 3120R are in contact at the approximate center in the left-right direction and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move to the central appearance position, display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 The screen can be closed as shown in FIG. 151 (a).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 151 (b) and 151 (c), the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are respectively moved in the left and right direction independently by the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181. Therefore, only the left door member 3120L and only the right door member 3120R can be moved (appeared) to the front side of the liquid crystal display means 1900.

  By the way, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 can be visually recognized through the vertically long rectangular opening of the frame 3121. Therefore, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R Is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, an image corresponding to the opening of the frame 3121 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as if it were the left door member 3120L or the right An illusion can be made as if an image is displayed on the door member 3120R. Therefore, the decoration (pattern of a rose) of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R can be changed variously, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made hard to get tired. In addition, a moving image may be displayed as an image, thereby making it possible for the player to illusion that the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R themselves are display means such as a liquid crystal display device or the like. Since this can be performed, collaboration effects of image effects and movable effects can be performed, and more colorful effects can be provided to the player.

[2-10. Back-to-back movable production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up-back movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 168. FIG. 152 is a front view of the back up rear movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the back up back movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is a back view of the back up back movable effect unit. FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rear movable presentation unit disassembled into an arm slide unit and an arm unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 156 is a back-up back movable presentation unit as an arm slide unit and an arm unit It is an exploded perspective view seen after being disassembled into FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the back-up and back movable effect unit, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the back-up and back movable effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the back-up rear movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the back-up rear movable effect unit as viewed from the rear.

  FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the back-up rear movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the back-up rear movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG. Also, FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the arm unit disassembled and seen from the rear; FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the arm unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the movement by the arm slide unit in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 168 is an explanatory view showing the movement by the arm unit in the back-up movable effect unit.

  The back-up back movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is disposed above the opening 3001 c in the back box 3001 and above the back-middle movable effect unit 3100. The back-up rear movable effect unit 3200 is mounted on the front of the back wall 3001 b above the opening 3001 c of the back box 3001 and extends in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width in the back box 3001. The slide unit 3210 includes an arm unit 3250 disposed on the front side of the slide unit 3210 and slidable in the left-right direction by the arm slide unit 3210 and imitating an arm (a lower part from the shoulder) of a predetermined character.

[2-10A. Arm slide unit]
As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the arm slide unit 3210 in the back-up and back movable presentation unit 3100 is attached to the front of the rear wall 3001 c of the back box 3001 and has a shallow box shape and an oblong rectangular shape whose front side is open. A slide base 3211, a slide rail 3212 attached to the lower front of the slide base 3211 and extending in the left and right direction, and a rack gear 3213a guided in the left and right direction by the slide rail 3212 and extending in the left and right direction at the upper end Is mounted on the slider 3213, and the pinion gear 3214 meshed with the rack gear 3213a of the slider 3213 and rotatably supported by the slide base 3211 and the pinion gear 3214 at a position of the slide base 3211 on the left side of the pinion gear 3214. A first transmission gear 3215 rotatably supported, and a second transmission gear 3216 meshed with the first transmission gear 3215 and rotatably supported by the slide base 3211 at a position on the left side of the first transmission gear 3214 in a front view; A small diameter small diameter gear 3217a meshing with the second transmission gear 3216, and a large diameter gear 3217b integrally rotated on the rear side of the small diameter gear 3217a and having a diameter larger than the small diameter gear 3217a, and the slide base 3211 has a second transmission gear 3216 Gear 3217 rotatably supported at a position on the left side of the front view, a drive gear 3218 meshed with the large diameter gear 3217 b of the transmission gear 3217 and disposed at the position on the left side in a front view of the transmission gear 3217, and a drive gear 3218 And an arm slide drive motor 3219, which is disposed on the front side of the drive gear and whose drive gear 3218 is fixed to the rotation shaft.

  The arm slide unit 3210 covers the front side from the pinion gear 3214 to the drive gear 3218 and is attached to the front left upper portion of the slide base 3211 and has a laterally long plate-shaped gear cover 3220 to which an arm slide drive motor is attached. A horizontally long slide guide 3221 which is disposed under the slide rail 3212 and is attached to the slide base 3211 and slidably supports the rear surface of the arm unit 3250, and is disposed near the left and right ends of the slide base 3211 respectively. A slide position detection sensor 3222 for detecting the position of the slider 3213, a sensor cover 3223 covering the front side of the slide position detection sensor 3222 and attached to the slide base 3211, and the slide base at a position on the right of the pinion gear 3214 in front view A back upper rear relay board 3224 for relaying connection between an arm slide drive motor 3219, a slide position detection sensor 3222, an arm unit relay board 3259, and a lamp drive board 3013 and a motor drive board 3015 attached to the front of 211. And a wiring presser 3225 for holding a wire connecting the back-rear back relay board 3224 and the arm unit relay board 3259.

  The slide rails 3212 in the arm slide unit 3210 use Accuride® slide rails. Further, detection pieces 3213 b extending upward are provided at both ends in the left and right direction of the slider, and the detection pieces 3213 b are detected by the slide position detection sensor 3222 so that the slider 3213 (arm unit 3250) The slide position can be detected. The gear cover 3220 of the arm slide unit 3210 cooperates with the slide base 3211 to extend around the pinion gear 3214, the first transmission gear 3215, the second transmission gear 3216, and the transmission gear 3217 in the longitudinal direction. Can be rotatably supported.

  The arm slide unit 3210 can move the slider 3213 in the lateral direction (slide) by the rack gear 3213 a meshed with the pinion gear 3214 when the pinion slide 3214 is rotationally driven by the arm slide drive motor 3219. The arm unit 3250 attached to the front can be moved in the left and right direction.

[2-10 B. Arm unit]
As shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the arm unit 3250 in the back-rear movable presentation unit 3200 is at a predetermined position on the arm unit base 3251 attached to the front of the slider 3213 in the arm slide unit 3210 and the arm unit base 3251. An upper arm unit 3300 formed in a shape imitating an upper arm of a predetermined character rotatably supported at the base end side by the first rotation shaft 3252 supported at the rear end side and extended in the front-rear direction and the first rotation shaft 3252 And an arm unit cover 3253 mounted on the front side of the arm unit base 3251 and supporting the front end side of the first pivot shaft 3252 while covering the proximal front face of the upper arm unit 3300 and attached to the front side of the arm unit cover 3253 The upper arm unit 3300 about the first pivot shaft 3252 An upper arm drive motor 3254 and a forearm unit 3350 disposed on the front side of the upper arm unit 3300 and rotatably supported on the tip end side of the upper arm unit 3300 and shaped to simulate the forearm of a predetermined character Have.

  Further, arm unit 3250 is larger than drive gear 3255 by being engaged with drive gear 3255 fixed to the rotation shaft of upper arm drive motor 3254 and disposed between arm unit base 3251 and arm unit cover 3253 and drive gear 3255. A large diameter gear 3256a having a diameter and a small diameter gear 3256b which is integrally rotatably disposed on the front side of the large diameter gear 3256a and has a smaller diameter than the large diameter gear 3256a and engages with the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 The transmission gear 3256 rotatably supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253 is provided.

  The arm unit 3250 is attached to the front of the arm unit base 3251, and has an arc-shaped sliding ridge centered on the first rotation shaft 3252 which can contact the rear surface of the arm unit base 3251 of the upper arm unit 3300. An upper arm rotation guide 3257 having a 3257a, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258 attached to a predetermined position of the arm unit cover 3253 and detecting rotation ends of the upper arm unit 3300 in both directions, and a first rotation shaft 3252 The arm unit relay substrate 3259 attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251 and the front surface of the arm unit relay substrate 3259 at a position on the left side in front view than the position where the And a plate-like substrate cover 3260 disposed and attached to the arm unit base 3251. .

  Furthermore, the arm unit 3250 is attached to the upper front of the arm unit cover 3253 and the base plate cover 3260 above the upper arm unit 3300 and extends forward, an upper guide bracket 3261 and a tip of the upper guide bracket 3261 And a guide roller 3262 supported rotatably around an axis extending in the vertical direction and capable of coming into contact with the rear surface of the unit base 3401 in the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 described later.

  Also, arm unit 3250 includes back-rear back relay board 3224 and upper arm drive motor 3254, upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258, upper arm decoration substrate 3305, forearm drive motor 3307, forearm rotation position detection sensor 3316, and forearm decoration 3352 And a wiring cover 3263 for fixing a wire connecting the arm unit relay substrate 3259 and the forearm decorative substrate 3353 provided in the forearm unit 3350.

  Also, the arm unit 3250 is inserted into the cylindrical first bush 3264 inserted into the first rotation shaft 3252 for rotatably supporting the upper arm unit 3300 and the second rotation shaft 3351 a of the forearm unit 3350 And a cylindrical second bush 3265 for rotatably supporting the forearm unit 3350 with respect to the upper arm unit 3300.

  Arm unit 3250, arm unit cover 3253 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear surface, the left surface, and a part of the bottom surface open in a front view, and the base end side of upper arm unit 3300 is housed inside The upper arm unit 3300 extends outward from the open left side surface and part of the bottom surface. One end side of an upper arm assist spring 3303 in an upper arm unit 3300 described later is engaged with the arm unit cover 3253.

  The upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is pivotably supported on the first pivot shaft 3252 whose proximal end is supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253 as shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 etc. An upper arm base 3301 elongated in a plate shape in a predetermined direction, and a fan-shaped member mounted on the rear side of the first axial portion 3301 a of the upper arm base 3301 and centered on the first rotation shaft 3252 The upper arm drive gear 3302 is engaged with the small diameter gear 3256b of the transmission gear 3256, and one end is engaged with the arm unit cover 3253 and the other end is engaged with the upper arm base 3301. The upper arm base 3 so that the tip side of the upper arm base 3301 pivots upward (clockwise direction in front view) centering on the An upper arm assist spring 3303 that applies a biasing force to 01, a, an upper arm decorative body 3304 that mimics the upper arm of the predetermined character covers the front with attached to the front of the upper arm base 3301.

  The upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300 is formed in a cylindrical shape in which a first shaft portion 3301a provided on the base end side is elongated in the front-rear direction, and the first rotation is performed via the first bush 3264 inside. The shaft 3252 is to be inserted. The upper arm base 3301 has a cylindrical second shaft 3301 b extending in the front-rear direction with a second rotation shaft 3351 a of a forearm unit 3350 described later inserted at the tip end, and the axial center of the second shaft 3301 b And a slit 3301 c formed in an arc shape and capable of restricting the rotation range of the forearm unit 3350. The upper arm base 3301 is formed of a translucent material.

  In the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300, the portion meshing with the small diameter gear 3256b of the transmission gear 3256 fan-shaped in a direction opposite to the tip end side of the upper arm unit across the axis of the first pivot shaft 3252 It is formed. The upper arm drive gear 3302 also includes a detection piece 3302 a that is detected by an upper arm rotational position detection sensor 3258 (see FIG. 163) attached to the arm unit cover 3253.

  Although the upper arm assist spring 3303 of the upper arm unit 3300 is not shown in detail, it is wound in a coil shape with the first pivot shaft 3252 as a substantially axial center, and is bent so that the tip on one end side extends forward. The rear arm unit cover 3253 is locked at a predetermined position. In the upper arm assist spring 3303, the coiled portion is disposed on the front side of the upper arm base 3301, and the other end extends to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through a through hole (not shown). It is locked on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 (see FIG. 162).

  The upper arm decorative body 3304 of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed at the proximal end side in the insertion hole 3304a through which the first shaft portion 3301a of the upper arm base 3301 can be inserted and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 3304a (upper left part in front view) A motor attachment portion 3304 b for attaching the forearm drive motor 3307 and a second shaft portion 3301 b of the upper arm base 3301 formed on the tip end side are passable, and a tip which penetrates fan-likely to the outer peripheral edge of the arcuate slit 3301 c An opening 3304c and a passage hole 3304d extending in an arc around the axis of the second shaft 3301b at the upper side in the drawing of the tip opening 3304c. The upper arm decorative body 3304 is formed to have translucency.

  In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 and is mounted on the front side of the upper arm base 3301 at the rear side of the upper arm base 3301. And a plate-like protection plate 3306 having a protrusion protruding rearward.

  Furthermore, the upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the motor attachment portion 3304 b on the front surface of the upper arm decoration 3304 and has a forearm drive motor 3307 whose rotation axis extends rearward and a rotation axis of the forearm drive motor 3307 A drive gear 3308 disposed between the 3304 and the upper arm base 3301, a driven gear 3309 engaged with the drive gear 3308 and rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and a large diameter large diameter gear engaged with the driven gear 3309 A transmission gear 3310 having a small diameter gear 3310 b integrally rotated on the front surface of the large diameter gear 3310 a and having a diameter smaller than that of the large diameter gear 3310 a and rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301. And the center of the drive gear 3311a and the drive gear 3311a. The transmission rotary body 3311 has a crankpin 3311b that protrudes forward from a position separated by a predetermined distance as the transmission base 3311 rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and the base end side can rotate with respect to the crankpin 3311b And a hook-like link member 3312 whose distal end is rotatably supported with respect to the transmission pin 3351b in the forearm unit 3350.

  The upper arm unit 3300 has one end attached to the longitudinal middle portion of the link member 3312 and the other end attached to a predetermined position of the upper arm base 3301, and the tip end of the forearm unit 3350 is upwards through the link member 3312 And a forearm rotational position detection sensor 3316 for detecting the rotational position of the transmission rotary body 3311.

  By rotating the transmission rotation body 3311 of the upper arm unit 3300, the crank pin 3311b revolves around a predetermined radius. Further, the transmission rotation body 3311 is provided with a slit 3311c extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis, and the restriction protrusion 3301d protruding from the upper arm base 3301 in the slit 3311c is inserted. Thereby, the transmission rotation body 3311 can be rotated only within the range of the slit 3311 c extending in an arc shape. Further, the transmission rotating body 3311 is provided with a detection piece 3311 d extended rearward. The detection piece 3311 d extends to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through the arc-shaped opening 3301 e of the upper arm base 3301, and the upper arm attached to the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301. It is detected by the rotational position detection sensor 3316.

  The upper arm unit 3300 further includes a lock bracket 3314 attached to cover a part of the forearm drive motor 3307 on the front surface of the upper arm decoration 3304 and a lock pin 3315 extending forward from the front surface of the lock bracket 3314 There is. The lock pin 3315 sets the engagement of the unit base 3401 in the back up front movable effect unit 3400 when the upper arm unit 3300 is in the storage position extending in a substantially horizontal direction and the arm slide unit 3210 is in the origin position. It is locked to the stop piece 3401e, and by locking to the lock piece 3401e, it is possible to prevent the upper arm unit 3300 from pivoting downward (see FIG. 174).

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 is offset from the second pivot shaft 3351a and the second pivot shaft 3351a that extend rearward from a predetermined position on the proximal end side by a predetermined amount. A plate-like forearm base 3351 having a transmission pin 3351b rotatably supporting the tip side of the link member 3312 extending rearward at a central position, and a front side of the forearm base 3351 attached to the front side And a forearm decoration 3352 which imitates the forearm of a predetermined character. In the forearm base 3351 of the forearm unit 3350, the transmission pin 3351b is disposed at a position obliquely lower left from the second rotation shaft 3351a in rear view. In addition, the forearm decorative body 3352 is formed to have translucency.

  In addition, forearm unit 3350 is disposed between forearm decoration substrate 3353 disposed between forearm decoration 3352 and forearm base 3351 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and forearm decoration substrate 3353 and forearm decoration 3352 And a diffusion lens member 3354 for diffusing light from the LED of the forearm decoration substrate 3353. The forearm unit 3350 irradiates the light from the LED of the forearm decoration substrate 3353 to the forearm decoration 3352 in a state of being diffused widely by the diffusion lens member 3354, and makes the whole forearm decoration 3352 substantially uniform. It can be made bright and decorative.

  The transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is inserted into the arc-shaped slit 3301c of the upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300, and then a disk-shaped end member is attached to the rear end. It is designed not to slip out of the inside of the slit 3301c. The forearm unit 3350 is configured to rotate only within the range of the slit 3301 c of the upper arm base 3301 extending in an arc shape centering on the axial center of the second rotating shaft 3351 a.

[2-10 C. Movement of arm unit]
Subsequently, the movement of the arm unit 3250 in the back-up and back movable presentation unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167 (a) etc., the arm unit 3250 of this example is in a state of being moved to the rightmost side in the front view by the arm slide unit 3210 (state of the origin position) in a normal state. In a normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 of the arm unit 3250 extend in a substantially horizontal direction, such that the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 overlap each other in a front view. It is in the state. In other words, in the normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (the storage position), and the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (the storage position). ing. As a result, the player can hardly visually recognize the arm unit 3250. Although details will be described later, in this normal position, the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 is locked (locked) to the locking piece 3401 e of the unit base 3401 of the back upper front movable effect unit 3400. The upper arm unit 3300 can not be rotated in the direction of the standby position (counterclockwise direction in front view).

  First, the movement by the arm slide unit 3210 will be described. As described above, when the drive gear 3218 is appropriately rotated by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 in the normal state (in this example, in the clockwise direction in front view), the drive gear 3218 The rotation is transmitted to the pinion gear 3214 via the transmission gear 3217, the second transmission gear 3216, and the first transmission gear 3215, and the slider 3213 is laterally moved via the rack gear 3213a engaged with the pinion gear 3214 by the rotation of the pinion gear 3214. It slides in a direction (in this example, left direction in front view).

  Then, when the slider 3213 of the arm slide unit 3210 slides, the arm unit 3250 attached to the front of the slider 3213 also slides together, and the entire arm unit 3250 is slid from the origin position in the left-right direction (left direction). (See FIG. 167 (b)). Even when the arm unit 3250 is slid in the lateral direction by the arm slide unit 3210 in a state where the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration 3352) overlap the arm unit 3250, The arm unit 3250 is almost invisible from the player side.

  In order to return the arm unit 3210 slid to the left from the origin position to the origin position, the arm slide drive motor 3219 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to that described above to allow the arm unit 3210 via the slider 3213. The whole can be slid in the right direction in a front view, and can be returned to the origin position.

  Next, the movement of the upper arm unit 3300 by the arm unit 3250 will be described. From a normal state where the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (in the storage position), the upper gear drive motor 3254 drives the drive gear 3255 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a counterclockwise direction in front view) When the drive gear 3255 is driven to rotate, the rotation of the drive gear 3255 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 via the transmission gear 3256, and the entire upper arm unit 3300 together with the upper arm drive gear 3302 is centered on the first pivot shaft 3252 It turns so that the side moves downward (appearing position side).

  In this example, the transmission gear 3256 is disposed between the drive gear 3255 and the upper arm drive gear 3302, and the rotation from the upper arm drive motor 3254 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 while being decelerated by the transmission gear 3256. It is supposed to be That is, by interposing the transmission gear 3256, the rotational torque of the upper arm drive motor 3254 is amplified and transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 (upper arm unit 3300), and even if the weight on the upper arm unit 3300 is heavy, the upper arm The load applied to the drive motor 3254 can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the upper arm unit 3300 can be turned within an angle range of about 90 degrees from the substantially horizontal storage position to the substantially vertically suspended standby position. (See FIG. 174 (c)). Further, by driving the upper arm drive motor 3254, the forearm unit 3350 is also pivoted about the first pivot shaft 3252 together with the upper arm unit 3300.

  When the upper arm unit 3300 is pivoted from the storage position in which the upper arm unit 3300 extends in a substantially horizontal direction to an appearance position in which the distal end side is lower than the base end side, the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, It can be viewed from the player side. When the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated in the direction of the appearance position while the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage state in which the upper arm unit 3300 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300, what the player actually sees is not the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300 The proximal end side of the forearm unit 3350 can be seen, and most of the upper arm unit 3300 is hidden by the forearm unit 3350.

  When returning the upper arm unit 3300 to the storage position from the state where the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is positioned lower than the base end side (state of the appearance position), the upper arm drive motor 3254 is reverse to the above direction By rotationally driving the upper arm unit 3300, the tip end side of the upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated upward, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be returned to the storage position.

  Subsequently, the movement of the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 will be described. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), in a state where the forearm unit 3350 extends in a substantially horizontal direction and overlaps with the upper arm unit 3300 (normal state), the forearm unit 3350 is rotatably supported by the weight of the forearm unit 3350. A rotational moment that causes the tip side of the forearm unit 3350 to move downward (rotate clockwise in a front view) about the second pivot 3351 a acts on the forearm unit 3350. Then, due to the rotational moment acting on the forearm unit 3350, the crankpin 3311b is directed to the crankpin 3311b of the transmission rotator 3311 via the link member 3312 connected to the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b. A pulling force will act.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in a state where the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (in the storage position), the crankpin 3311b in the transmission rotating body 3311 is the center of the crankpin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b. The axis connecting the center of the transmission rotary body 3311 is located above the center of the transmission rotary body 3311 (a position slightly reciprocated to one side), and the restriction projection 3301 d contacts one end of the slit 3311 c of the transmission rotary body 3311 It is in a state of contact. Then, in this state, when the pulling force in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b is applied to the crankpin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 by the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350, the crankpin 3311b approaches the transmission pin 3351b in the counterclockwise direction. In this state, the control protrusion 3301d is in contact with one end of the slit 3311c of the transmission rotation body 3311 so that the transmission rotation body 3311 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction. As a result, the crank pin 3311b continues to stop in the current state without revolving. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, even if the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotator 3311 rotates. Without, the forearm unit 3350 does not rotate naturally.

  In the arm unit 3250 of this example, the drive gear 3308 is properly directed by the forearm drive motor 3307 attached to the upper arm unit 3300 from the state of the storage position where the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 When it is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction (visually), the rotation of the drive gear 3308 is transmitted to the drive gear portion 3311a via the driven gear 3309 and the transmission gear 3310, and the transmission rotating body 3311 provided with the drive gear portion 3311a The crank pin 3311 b provided on the transfer rotating body 3311 rotates and revolves around the axis of the transfer rotating body 3311 with a predetermined radius. The proximal end side of a link member 3312 whose distal end is pivotally supported by the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is pivotally supported by the crank pin 3311b. The pin 3351b revolves around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in the direction in which the tip end side is away from the upper arm unit 3300 (the direction of the deployed position, clockwise direction in front view) It becomes.

  As described above, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, the rotational position of the crankpin 3311b is the axis connecting the center of the crankpin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b. The crankcase 3311 b and the transmission pin 3351 b when the transmission rotation body 3311 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the forearm drive motor 3307 since the position is slightly revolvable to one side (counterclockwise direction) with respect to the center. The crank pin 3311b pulls the transmission pin 3351b in the direction of the transmission rotation body 3311 through the link member 3312 until the axis line connecting the two passes through the center of the transmission rotation body 3311, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in the second direction. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft 3351a. Then, when the crank pin 3311 b is further rotated in the clockwise direction, and the axis line connecting the crank pin 3311 b and the transmission pin 3351 b moves below the center of the transmission rotary body 3311, the crank pin 3311 b is the link member 3312. As a result, the transmission pin 3351b is pushed in a direction away from the transmission rotation body 3311 via this, and the forearm unit 3350 is rotated clockwise around the second rotation shaft 3351a.

  In this example, the forearm unit 3350 can be pivoted in a clockwise direction in a front view within a range of about 60 degrees from the storage position overlapping the upper arm unit 3300.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the back-up and back movable effect unit 3200 of this example, sliding movement of the arm unit 3250 in the left-right direction, rotation of the upper arm unit 3300, and rotation of the forearm unit 3350 are independent of each other. Since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be simultaneously rotated, or the upper arm unit 3300 or the forearm unit 3350 can be rotated simultaneously with the slide, movement of various patterns is possible. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the motion more natural as a movable effect unit imitating the arm of a predetermined character, and to attract the player's interest strongly.

[2-11. Back-front front movable production unit]
Next, the back up front movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 169 to FIG. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the back up front movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the back up front movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper front movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper front movable effect unit as an exploded view. Further, FIG. 173 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back up front movable effect unit.

  The back up front movable effect unit 3400 is disposed on the front side of the back up back movable effect unit 3200 and attached to the front of the back box 3001. The back up front movable effect unit 3400 has a unit base 3401 attached to the front of the back box 3001 and a back up front attached to the back of the unit base 3401 through which the rotation axis extends forward through the unit base 3401. The drive motor 3402, a drive gear 3403 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back up front drive motor 3402 and disposed on the front side of the unit base 3401, a gear portion 3404a meshing with the drive gear 3403, and rotation on the front surface of the gear portion 3404a A drive rotor 3404 having a crankpin 3404b extending forward from a position eccentric to the center and supported rotatably by the unit base 3401 and a crankpin 3404a of the drive rotor 3404 slide in the left-right direction Of the first slit 3405a in the long hole shape which can be inserted and the positive of the first slit 3405a A pair of slide support shafts 3405b which are supported by the unit base 3401 extending rearward from a position on the left side of the drive rotary body 3404 to the rear and a left side relative to the slide support shafts 3405b. A link member 3405 having a long slit-like second slit 3405c extending to the bottom and disposed on the front side of the drive rotating body 3404 and slidably inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 and extending backward A transmission pin 3406a, and a rotation shaft 3406b disposed at a position on the left side of the transmission pin 3406a in a front view and rotatably supported by the unit base 3401 are provided based on the side on which the rotation shaft 3406b and the transmission pin 3406a are arranged. A back extending in a predetermined direction as an end side and formed in a shape imitating a predetermined item And a before and ornamental body 3406, a.

  The unit base 3401 of the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 has a configuration in which the upper end extends in the left and right direction and the portion on the left side in front view extends downward from the substantially center in the left and right direction at the upper end. The pair of guide rollers 3262 of the arm unit 3250 in the upper / rear movable effect unit 3200 can contact and roll in the left-right direction. Further, the unit base 3401 is provided with a motor attachment portion 3401 a for attaching the back upper front drive motor 3402 to the rear side of the left end in rear view, and a pair of slide supports of the link member 3405 disposed on the left side in front view of the motor attachment portion 3401 a A vertically extending elongated slit vertically extending slit 3401b into which the shaft 3405b is slidably inserted, and a pivot shaft 3406b of the back upper front decoration 3406 disposed on the left side in a front view of the vertically oriented slit 3401b And a rotary guide slit 3401d penetrating in an arc shape around the axial center of the axial hole 3401c.

  The unit base 3401 of the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 is provided with a locking piece 3401 e which is disposed on the left side in a front view with respect to the rotation guide slit 3401 d and protrudes leftward. By disposing the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 of the back-up back movable effect unit 3200 above the locking piece 3401 e, it is possible to restrict the downward movement of the lock pin 3315. It is possible to lock the unit 3300 from pivoting naturally.

  In the link member 3405 of the back-front front movable effect unit 3400, a long slit-shaped first slit 3405a is formed to have substantially the same length as the revolution radius of the crankpin 3404b in the drive rotating body 3404. Further, in the link member 3405, a pair of slide support shafts 3405b spaced apart in the vertical direction are respectively disposed at substantially symmetrical positions with respect to the upper and lower sides with respect to the axis of the first slit 3405a extended in the left and right direction. Furthermore, the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 is disposed at a position substantially coaxial with the axis of the first slit 3405a extending in the left-right direction.

  The link member 3405 is supported slidably in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of slide support shafts 3405 b into the upper and lower guide slits 3401 b of the unit base 3401, and the link member 3405 is inserted into the first slit 3405 a The crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 revolves to slide in the vertical direction. The pair of slide support shafts 3405b in the link member 3405 is slidably inserted into the upper and lower guide slits 3401b through the guide bushes 3407 inserted on both sides in front and rear of the unit base 3401. .

  The back top front decoration 3406 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400 is configured to extend in a predetermined direction, and is rotatably inserted through the bush 3408 from the rear face on the base end side to the shaft hole 3401 c of the unit base 3401. The pivot shaft 3406 b extends. Further, when the back upper front decoration 3406 is in a state of extending in the left and right direction so that the base end side is on the right side in front view, the lower right (axis of about 45 degrees) The transmission pin 3406a inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 from the position of the line) extends rearward.

  Further, the back upper front decoration 3406 extends rearward from a position opposite to the transmission pin 3406a with the turning shaft 3406b interposed therebetween, and is a pair of guide pins arranged on a circle around the turning shaft 3406b It has 3406c. A pair of guide pins 3406c of the back upper front decoration 3406 is slidably inserted into the rotation guide slit 3401d of the unit base 3401 via the guide bush 3409, and the rotation shaft 3406b is centered When the back upper front decoration 3406 is turned, swinging of the back upper front decoration 3406 can be suppressed as much as possible and can be smoothly turned on the same plane.

  Further, the back upper front decoration 3406 includes a detection piece 3406 d detected by a back upper front rotational position detection sensor 3410 attached to the front of the unit base 3401, and the back upper front decoration 3406 is substantially in the left-right direction. When in the extended position (stored position), the detection piece 3406 d is detected by the back up front rotation position detection sensor 3410.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper front decoration 3406 in the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper front decoration 3406 is in the state of the storage position extended in the left and right direction in a normal state as shown in FIG. 173 (a). In this state (in the storage position), the back front decoration 3406 is positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is hidden behind the center role 2500 so as to be hardly seen by the player.

  Further, when the back upper front decoration 3406 is in the normal position (housing position), the crankpin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 is positioned at the lowermost position (bottom dead center). In this state, the load of the back upper front decoration 3406 generates a rotation moment for rotating the back upper front decoration 3406 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view centering on the rotation axis 3406 b. Thus, a force acts to raise the link member 3405 via the transmission pin 3406a. However, since the crankpin 3404b inserted in the first slit 3405a of the link member 3405 is located at the bottom dead center, the transmission rotary body 3404 is rotated even if an upward force is applied to the crankpin 3404b. Instead, the back top front decoration 3406 continues to maintain the state of the storage position against the rotational moment.

  The drive gear 3403 is driven to rotate the drive gear 3403 in a predetermined direction (in the present embodiment, in the counterclockwise direction in the front view) by the back-front drive motor 3402 when the back-front front decoration 3406 is in the storage position. The drive rotating body 3404 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3404a meshed with the crank pin 3404b, and the crank pin 3404b is also revolved in the clockwise direction from the bottom dead center position. As the crank pin 3404 b revolves, the crank pin 3404 b is lifted, and the link member 3405 is also lifted as the crank pin 3404 b is lifted. Then, when the link member 3405 ascends, the transmission pin 3406a of the back upper front decoration 3406 inserted into the second slit 3405 c of the link member 3405 rises, and the back upper front decoration 3406 It turns in a counterclockwise direction in a front view around the turning shaft 3406b.

  When the back upper front decoration 3406 is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction, the tip side of the back upper front decoration 3406 is moved downward, and the front end of the back upper front decoration 3406 is the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is lowered to the player side and can be viewed from the player side. Then, when the crankpin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 reaches the top dead center located at the uppermost position by the back up front drive motor 3402, the rotational drive of the back up front drive motor 3402 is stopped and the lifting of the link member 3405 is stopped. At the same time, the pivoting of the back surface front decoration 3406 is also stopped.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), assuming that the crank pin 3404b is revolved to the top dead center, the back top front decoration 3406 is approximately 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the storage position. It is configured to be in a pivoted state (a state of a standby position).

  In the case where the back top front decoration 3406 is returned from the state of the appearance position where the tip end side is positioned below the base end side to the state of the storage position where the base end side and the tip end side have substantially the same height, The link member 3405 can be lowered via the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 by rotating the back and front drive unit 3402 in the opposite direction to that described above. The decorative body 3406 can be turned clockwise in a front view centering on the turning shaft 3406 b and returned to the storage position.

[2-12. Relationship between back-up front movable production unit and back-up back movable production unit]
Next, the relationship between the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 and the back-up back movable effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back up front movable effect unit and the back up back movable effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 175 is the back up front movable effect unit and back up back movable effect unit following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of.

  As shown in FIG. 174 and the like, the relationship between the back-up front movable production unit 3400 and the back-up back movable production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 is such that the back-up back movable presentation unit 3200 is directly behind the back-front front movable presentation unit 3400. It is in a state where it is arranged, the back top front decoration 3406 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400, the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (front arm decoration) of the back top back movable target unit 3200. And 3352) are formed in substantially the same size. The upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration 3352) are in the storage position shown in FIG. 174 (a) in a normal state.

  In addition, the back up front movable effect unit 3400 and the back up back movable effect unit 3200 are in the normal state (back up front decoration 3406, upper arm decoration 3304, and forearm decoration 3352 in the storage position, FIG. 174 (a ), The upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are almost hidden behind the back decoration 3406, and the back decoration is located above the liquid crystal display device 1900. Hidden behind the 3406 and the center character 2500, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are substantially invisible from the player side. Also, in this normal state, the lock pin 3315 of the forearm unit 3300 in the back-up back movable presentation unit 3200 abuts on the locking piece 3401 e of the unit base 3401 in the back-up front movable presentation unit 3400 and moves downward. Has been regulated (locked).

  From this normal state, the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 in the back-up back movable presentation unit 3200 is driven to slide the arm unit 3250 leftward in a front view, and the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 The lock pin 3315 is moved to a position on the left side of the locking piece 3401 e of the unit base 3401 in the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 (see FIG. 174 (b)). As a result, the lock pin 3315 can be moved downward, and the lock is released.

  Subsequently, the back top front drive motor 3402 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400 and the upper arm drive motor 3254 of the back top back movable effect unit 3200 are simultaneously driven to set the back top front decoration 3406 and the upper arm decoration 3304 ( And the forearm decorative body 3352) is rotated about 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a front view (see FIG. 174 (c)). In the state shown in FIG. 174 (c), the standby position where the back upper front decoration 3406 and the upper arm decoration 3304 are substantially hanging down (rotation about 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the storage position) is obtained. The upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are almost hidden behind the back surface front decoration 3406. When the back surface front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are in the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)), the back front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration in the standby position Reference numeral 3352 is located behind the second game area 2551 and so on so as to be invisible from the front view. However, even when in the standby position, when the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 or the forearm decoration 3352 vibrates or performs a small movement, for example, the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm Since a part of the decorative body 3304 or the forearm decorative body 3352 can be viewed from the front view, it is possible to grasp vibration or a minute movement.

  The upper arm decorative body 3304 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the upper arm drive motor 3254 while the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3304 are rotated to the standby position. The forearm decoration 3352 is turned clockwise (see FIG. 175 (d)). Thus, the proximal end of the upper arm decorative body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction, and the distal end side rotates so as to move away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 from the state where the forearm decorative body 3352 overlaps the upper arm decorative body 3304 The upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the back side of the back surface front decorative body 3406.

  Then, in this state, when the arm unit 3250 is moved leftward in a front view by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210, the tip side of the forearm unit 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decoration 3406 is The back arm moves to the left with respect to the front decoration 3406 so that the entire forearm decoration 3352 is in the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (see FIGS. 175E and 219).

  In this way, high-impact movable presentation combining the back-front decoration 3406 of the back-front front movable effect unit 3400 and the upper-arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 of the back-top rear movable effect unit 3200 is performed. And can entertain players. In addition to the above, the back-to-back movable decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 can perform movable patterns of various patterns by independently moving each at various timings. It is possible to make it hard to get bored.

[2-13. Back and back movable production unit]
Subsequently, the back bottom movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 176 to FIG. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the back-to-back rear movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the back-to-back rear movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit disassembled into the back-to-back decoration unit and the elevating unit etc., and FIG. 179 is a back-to-back back movable result unit. It is the disassembled perspective view disassembled into a decoration unit, a raising / lowering unit, etc. and seeing after. Further, FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back and back decoration unit of the back and back movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 181 is a disassembly and back view of the back and back decoration unit. It is a perspective view. FIG. 182 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back and rear back decoration unit. Further, FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the lifting and lowering unit in the back and forth rear movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back and back movable presentation unit.

  The back and bottom back movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001 c of the back box 3001 and on the front side of the back and inside movable effect unit 3100. The back and back movable effect unit 3500 raises and lowers the back and back rear decoration unit 3510 having the decoration imitating a tile roof building and the back and back back decoration unit 3510 in the vertical direction according to the game state and the back box. An elevator unit 3550 is mounted in the back 3001, and a back rear decoration substrate 3501 is mounted on the back side of the back rear decoration unit 3510. The back-bottom rear decoration substrate 3501 is provided with a plurality of LEDs that are turned on / off according to the number of lottery results held by the start winning.

  The back and back decoration unit 3510 in the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 is disposed below the first decoration 3511 and the first decoration 3511 which is formed to have a shape resembling the roof of a building extending in the left-right direction. It is disposed on the front side of the second decorative body 3512 and the horizontally long second decorative body 3512 formed in a shape imitating a wall of a building, and is formed in a shape imitating a building's blast, and from left to right The back rear movable decorative body 3513 (left movable body 3513 L, right movable body 3513 R) which can be separated and the back rear movable movable decoration body 3513 are supported slidably in the left and right direction and a second decorative body 3512 on the front surface. The unit cover 3514 has a shallow box-like unit cover 3514 attached horizontally and the rear side is open, and the rear side of the unit cover 3514 is closed. A laterally long plate-shaped unit base 3515 attached to the right seat 3561, and a.

  The first decorative body 3511 of the lower back rear decoration unit 3510 is provided with a plurality of hemispherical holding number display portions 3511 a arranged in the left and right direction at the upper end thereof, It is configured to emit light by the LED for holding display provided on the decorative substrate 3501. The number-of-retentions display portion 3511a can display the number of reservations by the number of light emission.

  The second decorative body 3512 of the back-bottom rear decoration unit 3510 has a horizontally long opening 3512 a formed substantially at the center in the left-right direction as illustrated. Further, a unit cover 3514 of the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 extends further downward from the lower left side of the rectangular portion elongated in the left and right direction in a front view, and a motor attachment portion for attaching a back bottom opening / closing drive motor 3516 An elongated hole-shaped left slit 3514b and a right slit formed in the lower part of a rectangular portion elongated in the left and right direction in a front view right side than the motor mounting portion 3514a and extended in the left and right direction And 3514c.

  In addition, the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 is attached to the front left side of the unit cover 3514 and penetrates the unit cover 3514 and the rotation axis extends backward, and the back bottom back opening and closing drive motor 3516 and the back bottom back opening and closing drive motor A drive gear 3517 fixed to the rotation shaft of 3516 and disposed between the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a first transmission gear engaged with the drive gear 3517 and rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515 3518, a second transmission gear 3519 meshed with the first transmission gear 3518 and rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a second transmission gear 3519 meshed with the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515 Left pinion gear 3520 supported by the And Ongia 3520 meshed with the left slider is slidably supported in the lateral direction by the unit cover 3514 has a left rack gear 3521a extending in the lateral direction 3521, and a.

  The left slider 3521 of the rear lower back decoration unit 3510 extends forward from the lower end of the plate-like hanging piece 3521b extending downward from the front end right end of the left rack gear 3521a extending in the left-right direction and the lower end of the hanging piece 3521b. And a pair of mounting bosses 3521c attached to the lower rear surface of the left movable body 3513L of the movable decorative body 3513 through the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514 and spaced apart in the left-right direction. There is. The left slider 3521 can be slid in the left-right direction by inserting a pair of mounting bosses 3521c into the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514, and is attached to the mounting boss 3521c of the left slider 3521 The left movable body 3513L can also slide in the left and right direction.

  The left slider 3521 is formed at the upper end of the hanging piece 3521b at the lower end right portion of the extending portion 3521d extending in a rod shape in the direction opposite to the left rack gear 3521a (right direction in front view) The right transmission rack gear 3521e extends in the left-right direction, and the detection piece 3521f protrudes forward from the left end of the extension portion 3521d. The left slider 3521 is biased by a tension spring 3531 in the right direction in a front view.

  In addition, the rear lower back decoration unit 3510 engages with the right transmission rack gear 3521 e of the left slider 3521 and is supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515 rotatably supported by the right pinion gear 3522 and the right pinion gear 3522. A right slider 3523 having a right rack gear 3523a disposed on the opposite side to the transmission rack gear 3521e and extending in the left-right direction meshing with the right pinion gear 3522 and slidably supported by the unit cover 3514 in the left-right direction; It is further equipped.

  The right slider 3523 of the rear lower back decoration unit 3510 extends forward from the front left side of the right rack gear 3523a extending in the left and right direction and is spaced apart in the left and right direction, and the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514 It has a pair of attachment bosses 3523b which are attached to the lower rear surface of the right movable body 3513R of the back movable rear body 3513 at the front end thereof. The right slider 3523 can be slid in the left-right direction by inserting the pair of mounting bosses 3523b into the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514, and is mounted to the mounting boss 3523b of the right slider 3523 The right movable body 3513R can also slide in the left and right direction.

  The pair of mounting bosses 3521c in the left slider 3521 and the pair of mounting bosses 3523b in the right slider 3523 are slidably supported with respect to the left slit 3514b and the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514 via the slide bushes 3530, respectively. It has become so.

  In addition, the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 is a light transmitting plate-like member disposed so that the front side faces the opening 3512 a of the second decoration 3512 between the second decoration 3512 and the unit cover 3514. A guiding lens member 3524 and a back and bottom rear decorative substrate 3525 disposed on the rear side of the guiding lens member 3524 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided. The front side of the guide lens member 3524 facing from the opening 3512 a of the second decorative body 3512 is hidden behind the back movable back up movable decorative body 3513 when the back movable back up movable decorative body 3513 is in a closed state, and can be seen from the player side It is not supposed to.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted to the guidance lens member 3524, the predetermined | prescribed character and decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are equipped, and light emission is carried out by making LED of the decoration board | substrate 3525 light It can be decorated. In addition, an open / close position detection sensor for detecting the slide position of the left slider 3521 (back and back movable ornament 3513) by detecting the detection piece 3521f of the left slider 3521 on the back surface of the back and back back decoration substrate 3525 3526 is attached.

  Furthermore, the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 is mounted on the back side of the unit cover 3514 with an auxiliary member 3527 attached to the lower front of the left movable body 3513 L and the right movable body 3513 R in the back bottom movable decoration 3513. The light from the LED for decoration mounted on the front side of the gear cover 3528 covering the back surface of the gear 3517 and the back side of the back decoration substrate 3501 is guided to the back surface of the first decoration 3511 to emit the entire first decoration 3511 And a light guide member 3529 for decoration.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the back and back decoration unit 3510 in the back and back movement presentation unit 3500 of this example is in the normal state (state of the closed position), as shown in FIG. 182 (a). The movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in contact with each other, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R become a blast. Although illustration is omitted, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are respectively provided with magnets arranged in a direction to draw each other, and are difficult to separate when they are in contact with each other.

  Further, in a normal state, the left rack gear 3521a and the right transmission rack gear 3521e of the left slider 3521 mesh with the left pinion gear 3520 and the right pinion gear 3522 at a substantially left end position in front view. Further, the right rack gear 3523a of the right slider 3523 is engaged with the right pinion gear 3522 at a position substantially at the right end in a front view.

  When the drive gear 3517 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (in this example, a clockwise direction in a front view) from the normal state by the back lower back open / close drive motor 3516, the first transmission gear 3518 and the second transmission gear 3519 are As a result, the left pinion gear 3520 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the left slider 3521 moves leftward by the left rack gear 3521a meshed with the upper side of the left pinion gear 3520.

  When the left slider 3521 moves leftward in a front view, the right transmission rack gear 3521e provided at the right end of the left slider 3521 also moves leftward, so the right pinion gear 3522 meshed with the right transmission rack gear 3521e It will turn in a counterclockwise direction in a front view. Then, the right slider 3523 is moved in the right direction by the right rack gear 3523 a meshed with the lower side of the right pinion gear 3522.

  Therefore, when the drive gear 3517 is rotated in the predetermined direction (clockwise direction in front view) by the back and rear back open / close drive motor 3516, the left slider 3521 moves in the left direction and the right slider 3523 moves in the right direction simultaneously. Therefore, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R attached to the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 move in directions of separating from each other.

  When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R move in the direction away from each other, the back and back movable decorative body 3513 is divided into right and left from the center in the horizontal direction, that is, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R By moving in a direction away from each other, the back and back movable decoration 3513 operates to open, and the back of the back and back movable decoration 3513 from between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R. The front side of the guide lens member 3524 placed in the lower part of FIG.

  When the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 reach the left moving end and the right moving end, respectively, the driving of the back and rear back open / close drive motor 3516 is stopped and the movement of the left movable body 3513 L and the right movable body 3513 R is also stopped. The back and bottom back movable decorative body 3513 is in the open state (see FIG. 182 (b)).

  In the case of returning from the open back position to the normal closed position, the back movable back and forth drive motor 3516 is rotated in the opposite direction to move the left movable back. The body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R can be moved in the direction in which they approach each other, and by moving until the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R abut, it is possible to return to the normal state. It has become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 178, FIG. 179, and FIG. 183, the lifting unit 3550 in the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 has a horizontally long plate-shaped unit body base 3551 attached to the back box 3001 and a unit body base 3551. Vertically disposed lift rack gear 3552 separately mounted in the left and right direction separately from the front face of the upper and lower lift rack gear 3552 on the left side in a front view and supported vertically by the unit body base 3551 A rod-shaped elevating shaft 3553, a plate-like left pedestal 3554 supported so as to be vertically movable by the elevating shaft 3553, and a box-like left gearbox 3555 attached to the front of the left pedestal 3554 so as to extend forward. And the left gearbox 3 attached to the left side of the left gearbox 3555 in a front view. A back-and-back back-and-forth drive motor 3556 in which the rotary shaft extends into the 55, and a drive gear 3557 fixed to the rotary shaft of the back / back back-and-forth drive motor 3556 and disposed inside the left gearbox 3555 Gear 3558a having a large diameter and a small diameter gear 3558b which is integrally rotated with the large diameter gear 3558a and smaller in diameter than the large diameter gear 3558a and is rotatably supported by the left gear box 3555, and a transmission gear A left pinion gear 3559 meshed with the small diameter gear 3558b of 3558 and meshed with a lifting rack gear 3552 disposed on the left side in a front view and rotatably supported by the left gearbox 3555.

  In addition, the lift unit 3550 in the back-rear movable effect unit 3500 is a guide support member 3560 extending vertically and attached to the front of the unit main body base 3551 adjacent to the lift rack gear 3552 on the right side in a front view A right pedestal 3561 slidably supported in the vertical direction by the 3560, a box-shaped right gearbox 3562 mounted to extend forward on the front surface of the right pedestal 3561, and a guide support penetrating the right gearbox 3562 One end (right end in front view) is rotatably and vertically slidably supported by member 3560, and the other end (left end in front view) is rotatably supported by left gearbox 3555 and left A pinion gear 3559 is integrally rotatably fixed, and extends in the left and right direction with a drive shaft 3563 And a, a right pinion gear 3564 meshing with the lift rack gear 3552 on the right is integrally rotatably fixed within the right gearbox 3562 in the drive shaft 3563.

  Furthermore, the lifting unit 3550 in the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 has a shaft cover 3565 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 at the left and right ends respectively and covers the drive shaft 3563 and a lamp drive attached to the front surface of the left pedestal 3554 A relay substrate 3566 for relaying the connection between the substrate 3013 and the motor drive substrate 3015 and the back and back opening / closing drive drive motor 3516 of the back and back decoration unit 3510 and the back and back back and forth decoration substrate 3525 etc. And a wire holding member 3567 which is attached at a position on the left side in front view with respect to the left pedestal 3554 and which can hold a wire, and a lower portion of the wire holding member 3567. Elevation position detection sensor 3568 for detecting the elevation position of And referring to FIG. 184), and a. The elevation position detection sensor 3568 can detect the elevation position of the back rear decoration unit 3510 by detecting the detection piece 3555a (see FIG. 184) provided in the left gearbox 3555. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the left pedestal 3554 of the lifting and lowering unit 3550 is vertically movably supported by a plurality of rollers 3569 in contact with the lifting and lowering shaft 3553. Further, the lifting unit 3550 has the left and right ends of the unit base 3515 of the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561, respectively.

  When the elevating unit 3550 is driven to rotate the drive gear 3557 in a predetermined direction by the lower back and rear elevating drive motor 3556, the left pinion gear 3559 is rotated via the transmission gear 3558 meshed with the drive gear 3557. The right pinion gear 3564 disposed on the right side via the drive shaft 3563 constituting the rotational shaft of 3559 is also rotated in the same direction as the left pinion gear 3559. When the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564 rotate simultaneously, the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564 mesh with the left pinion gear 3564 and are fixed to the unit body base 3551. The pinion gear 3564 moves in the vertical direction.

  That is, the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal are supported via the left gear box 3555 and the right gear box 3562 which rotatably support the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively, by rotationally driving the back down raising / lowering driving motor 3556. The 3561 moves in the vertical direction, and the back rear decoration unit 3510 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 can also be moved in the vertical direction.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 is positioned downward by the lifting unit 3550 and the back bottom back movable decoration body 3513 is closed (normal state) It is in the closed position) (see FIG. 184 (a)). In this normal state, a part of the first decoration 3511 and the back and back movable decoration 3513 in the back and back decoration unit 3510 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. See FIG. 108 and the like).

  Then, from the normal state, the back bottom rear raising / lowering drive motor 3556 is rotationally driven to raise the entire back bottom back decoration unit 3510 from the lowered position to the raised position (see FIG. 184 (b)). As a result, the first decorative body 3511, the second decorative body 3512 and the back rear movable decorative body 3513 of the lower back rear decoration unit 3510 are positioned above the stage 2510 of the center character 2500 from the player side. It will be visible enough.

  With the back bottom back decoration unit 3510 moved to the raised position, the back bottom back opening / closing drive motor 3516 moves the left movable body 3513 L and the right movable body 3513 R of the back bottom back movable movable body 3513 away from each other By doing this, the closed position in contact with each other is changed to the open position in which they are separated from each other. When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in the open position in which the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are separated from each other, the front side of the guide lens member 3524 disposed on the rear side from between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R is the player side It becomes visible from (refer to FIG. 184 (c)). In this state, by emitting light of the LED of the back-and-back back decoration substrate 3525 disposed on the rear side of the guiding lens member 3524, the guiding lens member 3524 can be made to emit light and decoration. Can be made to suggest the arrival of opportunities etc.

  In addition to the movement described above, the movement of the back-to-back movable effect unit 3500 includes the back-to-back movement of the back-to-back decoration unit 3510 before moving the back-to-back decoration unit 3510 to the raised position After changing the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the rear movable decorative body 3513 from the state of the closed position to the state of the open position, the back rear decoration unit 3510 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. It is good.

[2-14. Back lower front movable production unit]
Next, the back bottom front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 185 to FIG. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 186 is a rear perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit in the back unit. Further, FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as the disassembled state. Further, FIG. 189 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back lower front movable effect unit.

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001 c in the back box 3001 and is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060, and from the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. It is possible for the player to visually recognize through the transparent game panel 1200 at the lower position (see FIG. 109 etc.). The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 includes a back lower front left unit 3600L and a back lower front right unit 3600R which are respectively provided on the left and right sides across the center of the game area 1100 in the left and right direction, as shown. The back lower front left unit 3600L and the back lower front right unit 3600 R are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the left-right direction.

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 (back lower front left unit 3600 L and back lower front right unit 3600 R) is attached to the front of the ball guiding unit 3060 and has a shallow box-like unit base 3601 open at the front, and a unit base In the box 3601, the first decorative body 3602 is disposed at a position near the center in the horizontal direction in the gaming area 1100 and formed in a shape imitating a lantern, and the gaming area 1100 in the first decorative body 3602 before the back. A back second front decoration 23603 arranged on the opposite side (outside) to the center in the left-right direction and imitating a lantern and formed a size smaller than the first front decoration 3602 and a second back decoration It is arranged on the opposite side (outside) to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 in the body 3603 and imitates a lantern and has a lower back than the second decoration body 3603 in front and behind And around small under-formed back before the third decorative body 3604, and a.

  The back lower front first decorative body 3062 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 extends back from a position lower than the rotation shaft 3602 a extending from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface and the rotation shaft 3602 a And an actuating shaft 3602b. Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3063 includes a pivot shaft 3603a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and an operating shaft 3603b extending rearward from a position lower than the pivot shaft 3603a. Have. Furthermore, the back lower front third decorative body 3604 includes a pivot shaft 3604a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and an operating shaft 3604b extending rearward from a position below the pivot shaft 3604a. Have. A weight is attached to the lower front of the first lower back decoration 3602, the second lower back decoration 3603, and the lower third lower decoration 3604, respectively.

  The unit base 3601 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3600 is a first bearing portion for rotatably supporting the back bottom front first decoration body 3602 with the pivot shaft 3602 a of the back bottom front first decoration body 3602 being inserted. 3601a, a first opening 3601b formed on the lower side of the first bearing portion 3601a and through which the actuating shaft 3602b of the back bottom first decoration 3602 can pass, and rotation of the back bottom second decoration 3603 The second bearing portion 3601c for inserting the shaft 3603a and rotatably supporting the back lower third decoration 3603, and the operation of the lower back second decoration 3603 formed under the second bearing 3601c The second opening 3601d, through which the shaft 3603b can pass, and the pivot shaft 3604a of the back third front body 3604 are inserted and thirdly for rotatably supporting the back front third wood 3604 Bearing 36 It includes a 1e, a third opening 3601f the operation shaft below the back are formed on the lower side of the third bearing portion 3601e front third decorations 3604 3604B is can pass through the.

  The first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f of the unit base 3601 are circular around the axis of the first bearing 3601a, the second bearing 3601c, and the third bearing 3601e, respectively. In the first opening 3601 b, the second opening 3601 d, and the third rear portion 3601 f, the back front first decorative body 3602, the back front second decorative body 3603, and The operating shafts 3602b, 3603b, and 3604b of the third lower back front decoration 3604 can be moved freely. Further, in the unit base 3601, the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third opening are centered on the axes of the first bearing 3601a, the second bearing 3601c, and the third bearing 3601e, respectively. An arc-shaped guide groove 3601g is formed on the lower front surface of the portion 3601f.

  With respect to the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back first front decorative body 3602, the second back front second decorative body 3603, and the back front first Respective pivot shafts 3602 a, 3603 a, 3604 a of the three decorative members 3604 are rotatably inserted and supported via the bush 3605. In addition, through the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back bottom first decoration body 3602, the back bottom second decoration body 3603, and the back bottom third The pivots 3602 a, 3603 a, 3604 a of the decorative body 3604 extend to the rear side of the unit base 3601. Furthermore, through the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f of the unit base 3601, the back first front decorative body 3602, the back front second decorative body 3603, and the back front third The operating shafts 3602 b, 3603 b, 3604 b of the decorative body 3604 extend to the rear side of the unit base 3601.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 has one end on the operation axes 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the lower back lower first decorative body 3602, the lower back lower second decorative body 3603, and the lower back lower third decoration 3604. Each has a projection 3606a inserted into the corresponding guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601 at the other end, and the back first front decorative body 3602, the back front second decorative body 3603, And a rotation restricting member 3606 attached to the rear side of the back third front body 3604. The rotation restricting member 3606 is a back decoration front first decoration body 3602, a back decoration front second decoration body 3603, and a back decoration front third decoration body by a projection 3606a inserted into the guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601. The rotation range can be restricted so that the 3604 does not rotate beyond the range of the guide groove 3601g.

  In addition, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed on the back side of the unit base 3601 and is a turn in the back lower front first decoration 3602, the back lower front second decoration 3603, and the back lower third decoration 3604. Crank pins 3607a, mounted at the rear ends of the moving shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a and the actuating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b, respectively, and extending rearward from a position different from the axis of the rotating shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a, A first crank member 3607, a second crank member 3608, and a third crank member 3609 having 3608a and 3609a are provided. In this example, the crankpins 3607a and 3609a of the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 are coaxial with the actuating shafts 3602b and 3604b of the back first back decoration 3102 and the back third back decoration 3604. The crankpin 3608a of the second crank member 3608 is disposed on the upper side, and at the opposite position across the pivot shaft 3603a with respect to the actuating shaft 3603b of the second lower back decorative member 3603. .

  Furthermore, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is slidable in the left and right direction in a front view, and the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are provided. A slider 3610 having a transmitting portion 3610a inserted in a loosely fitted state, and a back lower front drive solenoid 3611 for moving the slider 3610 in the lateral direction are provided. By sliding the slider 3610 in the left-right direction by the back lower front drive solenoid 3611, the cranks of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 inserted in the transmission portion 3610 a of the slider 3610 The pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a may be moved in the left-right direction to turn the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 around the pivots of the pivots 3602a, 3603a, 3604a. Back by rotating the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, the first back decoration 3602, the second back decoration 3603, and the third back decoration The body 3604 can be turned.

  Further, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 and the slider 3610, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601. A plate-like slide having an opening 3612a through which crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609 of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 can pass, and supporting the slider 3610 in the left-right direction A base 3612 and a unit cover 3613 attached to the rear side of the slide base 3612 and covering the rear side of the slider 3610 and the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 are provided.

  Also, a back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the unit base 3601 and the slide base 3612 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3614 is provided. In this example, the unit base 3601, the first back decoration before the back second back 3602, the second back decoration before the second back light 3603, and the third back light before the back second decoration 3604 are formed to have light transmitting properties. The light emitting decoration of the back bottom first decoration 3602, the back bottom second decoration 3603, the back bottom third decoration 3604 and the like can be performed by appropriately emitting the LED of the back bottom decoration substrate 3614 It can be done.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 will be described. In the back bottom movable effect unit 3600, in a normal state (in a state where the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is not energized), as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the plunger of the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is The coil spring (not shown) advances (projects) toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 in a front view. In addition, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the second front decoration 3603 is arranged on the rear side of the back bottom front first decoration 3602 and the back bottom front third decoration 3604.

  In this normal state, when the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to move the plunger backward (move away from the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100), the slider 3610 connected to the tip of the plunger is also the same as the plunger It will slide a predetermined amount in the direction. Then, when the slider 3610 slides, the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 inserted into the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610 transmit the transmission portion 3610a. Thus, the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 rotate around the axes of the pivots 3602a, 3603a, 3604a. It will be done.

  The first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the third crank member 3609 in the back movable front effect unit 3600 are the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609. In the second crank member 3608, the crankpins 3607a and 3608a are disposed by the slider 3610, while the second crank member 3608 is disposed on the upper side than the pivots 3603a. , 3609a in the same direction, only the second crank member 3608, and the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 rotate in the opposite direction.

  The back of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are connected by the rotation of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, respectively. The front first decorative body 3602, the back and front second decorative body 3603, and the back and front third decorative body 3604 rotate respectively. That is, when the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to slide the slider 3610, the back bottom front first decoration body 3602 and the back bottom front third decoration body 3604 are respectively rotated in the same direction, The two-decorative body 3603 is turned in the opposite direction to the back-front first decor body 3602 and the back-front third decor body 3604 (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  Note that when the back bottom drive solenoid 3611 is released, the plunger of the back bottom drive solenoid 3611 moves forward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown), and the slider 3610 moves to the normal position as the plunger moves. To move and rotate in the opposite direction to the first lower back decoration 3602 and the lower third lower decoration 3604 via the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 Then, the back bottom front first decoration body 3602, the back bottom front second decoration body 3603, and the back bottom front third decoration body 3604 rotate in the opposite direction to the above and return to the normal state.

  As a result, since the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 can rotate the back bottom front first decoration body 3602, the back bottom front second decoration body 3603, and the back bottom front third decoration body 3604, the back bottom front is operated. By sliding the slider 3610 back and forth in the left-right direction by the drive solenoid 3611, the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 causes the back bottom front first decoration body 3602, the back bottom front second decoration body 3603, and the back bottom front third decoration body The 3604 can be swung with the user to attract the player's attention.

  In addition, the second lower front decoration 3023 disposed between the first lower back decoration 3602 and the third lower back decoration 3604 is the first lower back decoration 3602 and the third lower back decoration. Since it rotates in the opposite direction to the decorative body 3604, the first lower back decoration 3602, the second lower back decoration 3023, and the third lower back decoration 360 move to the player. It is possible to make it possible to enjoy the movement of the first back decoration before the second back decoration 3602, the second back decoration before the second back decoration 3603, and the third back decoration before the back decoration 3604.

[2-15. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 190 to FIG. FIG. 190 is a perspective view showing a back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 193 is an explanatory view showing the movement of one movable unit in the back left movable effect unit, and FIG. 194 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back left movable effect unit.

  The back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is disposed on the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 on the left side of the opening 3001 c of the back box 3000. The back left movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the unit base 3701 attached to the left of the opening 3001 c on the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3001 and to the front of the unit base 3701 side by side in the vertical direction. Three movable units 3710 (back left upper movable unit 3710 A, back left middle movable unit 3710 B, back left lower movable unit 3710 C), and a light transmitting plate disposed on the front side of the movable unit 3710 and attached to the unit base 3701 Decorative base 3702, a back left decoration substrate 3703 mounted on the front side of the decoration base 3702 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front side of the back left decoration substrate 3703 is mounted on the decoration base 3702 and the back side is open Shallow box-like, translucent left back A member 3704, and a side decoration substrate 3705 disposed along the right side in a front view between the back left decoration member 3704 and the decoration base 3702 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the right direction; Is equipped.

  The back left movable effect unit 3700 of this example can emit light of the back left decorative member 3704 in a planar shape by causing the LEDs of the back left decorative substrate 3703 to emit light. Although the back left decoration member 3704 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is not shown in detail, it is arranged on the rear side of the left area of the center character 2500 in front view in the gaming area 1100. By making the back left decorative member 3704 emit light in a plane, the corresponding part of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 is brightly decorated. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to show the inside of the game area 1100 brighter and make it more noticeable.

  The unit base 3701 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is substantially the same as the three first shaft portions 3701a extending forward from near the right end in front view and separated from each other in the vertical direction and each first shaft portion 3701a It has three second shaft portions 3701b arranged at height and extending forward from a position slightly to the right from the left end, and three solenoid attachment portions 3701c arranged at the upper right of each second shaft portion 3701b. . The unit base 3701 is also provided with a forwardly extending mounting boss for mounting the decorative base 3702.

  The three movable units 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 are configured by substantially the same mechanism. The movable unit 3710 has a back left drive solenoid 3711 attached to each of the three solenoid attachment portions 3701 c of the unit base 3701 so that the plunger protrudes downward, and a connecting portion to which the tip of the plunger in the back left drive solenoid 3711 is connected. 3712a, flange 3712b extending in the left-right direction with the connection 3712a halfway, shaft hole 3712c formed on the left end side in front view of the flange 3712b and into which the second shaft 3701b of the unit base 3701 is rotatably inserted, The movable lever 3712 has an elongated hole-like engagement hole 3712d which is formed at the opposite end of the collar 3712b and extends in the same direction as the collar 3712b, and the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712. Engaging pin 371 rotatably and slidably inserted therein a, a first collar portion 3713b extending rightward in a front view from one end side of the engagement pin 3713a, and a first shaft portion 3701a of the unit base 3701 formed rotatably on the right end side of the first collar portion 3713b An operation lever 3713 having a rotation hole 3713c, and a second collar portion 3713d which is longer than the first collar portion 3713b in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the first collar portion 3713b extends from the rotation hole 3713c; Is equipped.

  As illustrated, the movable lever 3712 of the movable unit 3710 has a connecting portion 3712a connected to the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 at a position close to the shaft hole 3712c on the base end side. The distance between the engagement hole 3712 d on the tip end side and the connection portion 3712 a is formed longer (four to six times in this example) than the distance between the connection portion 3712 a and the connection portion 3712 a. Thus, the moving distance of the engagement hole 3712 d in the movable lever 3712 is larger than the advancing and retracting distance of the plunger of the back left driving solenoid 3711.

  The movable unit 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is rotatably supported at the tip of the second hook 3713 d of the actuating lever 3713 and has a back left first movable decorative body 3714 with a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. , And is disposed between the back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the second collar portion 3713 d and rotatably supported at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the second collar portion 3713 d and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front side The back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left second movable decorative body 3715 are disposed on the rear side and attached to the front of the second collar portion 3713 d and the back left having a three-dimensional decoration on the front side A third movable decorative body 3716 and a back left movable decorative substrate 3717 attached to the rear side of the second left 371 d behind the third movable back decoration 3716 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface ing.

  In this example, the actuating lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are each formed to have a light transmitting property, By making the LED of the back left movable decoration substrate 3717 emit light, the back left first movable decoration 3714, the back left second movable decoration 3715, and the back left third movable decoration 3716 can be made to emit light. It has become.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described. In the back left movable effect unit 3700, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), the plungers of the back left drive solenoids 3711 in the three movable units 3710 vertically arranged are protruded downward, The distal end side (the engagement hole 3712 d side) of the movable lever 3712 is positioned lower than the base end side (the shaft hole 3712 c side). The tip end side (engagement pin 3713a side) of the first hook portion 3713b of the actuating lever 3713 is pivoted through the engagement pin 3713a inserted into the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 (first shaft). The second flange portion 3713d extending upward from the pivot hole 3713c is positioned to the left in a front view than the pivot hole 3713c.

  Thus, in the normal state, the second flange 3713d of the actuating lever 3713 is located on the left side of the pivot hole 3713c (the first shaft 3701a), so the back left supported by the second flange 3713d The first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are also positioned to the left as a whole. Therefore, in the normal state, most of the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are located on the left side of the right end of the unit base 3701. It is in a state where it is difficult to see from the person's side (see FIG. 194 (a) etc.).

  When the back left drive solenoid 3711 is driven to move the plunger upward from this normal state, the movable lever 3712 pivots in a counterclockwise direction in a front view centering on the shaft hole 3712c, and the tip side engagement is achieved. The hole 3712 d rises and moves to a position higher than the shaft hole 3712 c. When the engaging hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 is raised, the engaging pin 3713a of the actuating lever 3713 inserted in the engaging hole 3712d is also raised, and the whole actuating lever 3713 is moved along with the raising of the engaging pin 3713a. It will rotate in the clockwise direction in front view. As a result, the second collar 3713d of the actuating lever 3713 moves to a position to the right of the pivot hole 3713c, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 supported by the second collar 3713d, the back left second The movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 also move to the right (see FIG. 193 (b)).

  The actuating lever 3713 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the drive of the back left drive solenoid 3711 and the back left first movable decoration 3714, the back left second movable decoration 3715, and the back left third movable decoration When the 3716 moves to the right, most of the back left first movable decorative body 3714, back left second movable movable body 3715, and back left third movable decorative body 3716 are positioned to the right of the right end of the unit base, It appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can be seen well from the player side (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  When the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are moved by the rotation of the operating lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, Since an inertial force acts on the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716, when the actuation lever 3713 starts rotating or stops rotating, the inertial force acts on them. The back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the back left second movable decorative body 3715 supported so as to swing with respect to each other.

  In addition, when the back left driving solenoid 3711 is stopped in a state where the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable movable body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 appear, The movable lever 3712 is pivoted so that the tip end side (engagement hole 3712 d side) moves downward by gravity, and the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 is returned to the normal state in which it protrudes downward.

[2-16. Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and is mounted to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 accommodating the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 195) and the like and a lower portion of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By appropriately rotating the volume 1912 in the direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3. It has become.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light intensity white LED as a backlight.

[3. Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 has a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first start opening sensor 3022 that detects gaming balls received to the first start opening 2101, and a second start opening sensor that detects gaming balls received to the second start opening 2102. Detection signals from the 2127 and the second count sensor 2556 are input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, respectively, or the magnetic sensors attached to the gate sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3071, the count sensor 2128 and the back unit 3000 A detection signal from the detection sensor 3072 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the starting port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid via the panel relay board 3012 2124, and outputs a drive signal to the second attachment solenoid 2561, or the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 back and back decoration board 33501, and the function display board 1191 First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, game Drive signal to status indicator 1183, round indicator 1190 Output to or.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, the count sensor 2128, and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3071. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3022, the second starting opening sensor 2127, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 3022, the second start opening sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. In addition, when the big hit game state which becomes advantageous for the player occurs, because the big winning a prize opening 2103 and the 2nd big winning a prize opening 2552 are opened and the game sphere enters frequently, with the count sensor 2128 and the 2nd count sensor 2556 The detection of gaming balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long lifetime is also used for the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3071 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2104 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3071.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. Describe) BC0 (see FIG. 169). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e by the capacitor BC0 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls performs payout control by the payout control unit 4111 which performs various control related to payout and the firing solenoid 654 and An emission control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and an award ball tank 720 , A ball rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball releasing operation.

[3-2A. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 195, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the payout control MPU 4111a are operating normally. And a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are inputted. The payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740. And. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), the payout control MPU 4111 a is for preventing fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  An out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay substrate 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the inlet of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotating body 748 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are firstly transmitted through the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Is input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 4120 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is, as shown in FIG. 195, a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the launch reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. . The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or finger is touching the front of the rotating handle main body 506 and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal is first input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main side relay terminal plate 880, and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d emits a drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with a striking strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. In response to the input of the reference pulse, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . Due to the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, peripheral control board 4010 performs peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from main control board 4100, and liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[3-3 A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. Transmit the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc provided from the lamp driving board serial I / O port to the lamp driving board 3013 or the motor driving board 3015 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 or each decoration provided on the game board 4 A game board side driving light emission data comprising game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, a gradation lighting signal, etc. to a color LED etc. of a substrate The dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 transmits the data from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to each of the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 etc. attached to the back surface of the back box 3001. And other door drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5. Door side light emission data, and door side drive light emission data from the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive board through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 through the door frame base board Transmit control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to 194 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port In addition to or, or output control signal for extracting the sound information from the sound ROM4140d (sound command) to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detecting sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are respectively relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. matched to various effects flow from the speaker 821 and provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body outputted from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the respective relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 etc. attached to the back surface of the back box 3001 This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the drive command and the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 are supplied with a lighting signal or a blinking signal through the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received door frame side lighting blink command. A lighting signal or flickering based on the game board side lighting flickering command that is output to the LEDs such as the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the door frame 5. Output a signal to the LEDs on the decorative board 2153, 2310, 2311, 2511, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501, 3525, 363, 3703, 3705, 3717, etc. provided on the game board 4 Do. Also, each of the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 receives the drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body, and the door frame 5 through the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. Output to the dial drive motor 414 provided in the drive motor, each drive motor 3161, 316, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, 3516, 3556, etc. provided in the game board 4, and the drive solenoid 2330, 2630, 3611, 1371 etc. Do.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 and peripheral side relay terminals Speakers of the main body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through the plate 882 or through the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, and 3069 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From 821, control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to a low-pitch speaker 821 It is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[3-4. Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 195, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands and various data. Liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for display control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above, character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d And a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150 c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display 1900. I have control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding schedule data, and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the schedule data progresses.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a method to output.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing the respective persons is called "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the liquid crystal display device 1900 receives the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the main scanning is sequentially performed for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It outputs to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the pixels are output to pixels for one line sequentially from left to right.

[4. Game content]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, the functional configuration relating to the game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, about the functional structure which concerns on payout of a game ball, it abbreviate | omits. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game control, effect control, and the like are embodied by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. In this main control board 4100, when the detection signal of the game ball is input from the gate sensor 2402, the ordinary random number generation means 4200 for generating a predetermined ordinary random number which is a lottery result for the ordinary symbol, and the generated ordinary random number Of the main control board 4100 corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random pattern based on the normal random numbers temporarily stored based on the normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol storage means 4202 The normal symbol display control means for changing and displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 which is selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in 4206 and normal symbol display control means 4206 displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 Start opening opening and closing control means 4208 which drives the start opening solenoid 2121 to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105 when the passing random number (normal lottery result) is “normal hit”, and is stored and stored in the normal symbol storage means 4202 An ordinary symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying on the ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 the number of the ordinary drawing random numbers as the storage number is provided.

  The normal symbol holding storage unit 4202 described above has a predetermined number (for example, four) of the normal random numbers generated in response to the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display control unit 4206 ) And hold the execution of the stored random number until the variable display of the symbol is possible.

  In addition, on the main control board 4100, the first predetermined lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first starting opening 2101 A first special random number generation means 4212 for generating a special random number, and a first special symbol hold storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generation means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; Generated based on the first special lottery result based on the first special random number stored by the first special symbol reserve storage means 4214 and the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the selected variation random number is selected from the predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. The first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 is variably displayed based on the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 and the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 The number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol display control means 4218 and the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 is displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 as the number of first special symbols stored number And display control means 4220.

  Furthermore, on the main control board 4100, a second predetermined special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start opening sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start opening 2102 A second special random number generation means 4222 for generating a special random number, and a second special symbol hold storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generation means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; The second special lottery result based on the second special random number stored in the second special symbol retention storage means 4224 and the occurrence based on the detection signal detected by the second starting opening sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second starting opening 2102 The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the selected variation random number is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. The second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 is variably displayed based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 and the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 Second special symbol memory number display to display the second special symbol memory display 1187 as the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol display control means 4228 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 And control means 4230.

  The first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are new special symbols such as the first and second special symbols being changed display by the first and second special symbol display control means 4218, 4228 The first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting opening sensor 2127 can not be changed and displayed in predetermined numbers (for example, four each) ) And hold the execution of the first special random number and the second special random number stored until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

  In addition, on the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224, the start winning prize to the starting openings 2101, 2102 The system is provided with a priority reserve digesting means 4231 for giving priority to the second special random number (timing) rather than timing, and the second reserve random number according to the priority reserve digesting means 4231 relates to the second starting port 2102 Holding of the lottery results is prioritized and executed (digested).

  In addition, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 on the main control board 4100 If the special lottery result based on the special lottery result is "big hit", the player generates a big hit gaming state in which the player is advantageous. If the special lottery result is "small hit", the small hit gaming state is generated. The opening / closing member 2106 or the second opening / closing member 2553 for closing the large winning opening 2103 or the second large winning opening 2552 based on an instruction from the gaming state generation means 4232 and the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232 in a predetermined pattern A special winning opening / closing control means 4234 is provided to drive and control the attachment solenoid 2124 or the second attachment solenoid 2561. In this example, the special winning opening / closing drive control means 4234 drives, for example, the attacker solenoid 2124 when the special lottery result is "big hit", and the second attacker solenoid 2561 when the special lottery result is "small hit". It is supposed to be driven.

  In addition, according to the special lottery result based on the first special random number or the second special random number (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), the main control board 4100, the first special symbol variation pattern table or the second It further comprises fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the special symbol fluctuation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 is for changing to a fluctuation pattern table (for example, a fluctuation pattern table in the low probability non-shorting state, a fluctuation pattern table in the high probability time, etc.) according to the gaming state.

  Furthermore, on the main control board 4100, a special lottery result based on the first special random number and the second special random number (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), a first according to the first special lottery result and the variable random number Based on the first special symbol variation pattern, the second special lottery result and the second random symbol variation pattern according to the variation random number, and the first special symbol memory, the second special symbol memory, etc., predetermined control such as effect command And a command transmission unit 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generation unit 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is transparent by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game ball is started to be launched into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front of the panel 1200. The game balls driven into the upper part in the game area 1100 flow down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be hit harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at a suitable position in the front of the game panel 1200 with a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball is in contact with the obstacle nails to allow the game balls to flow down. While the speed is suppressed, various motions are given to the game ball and the motions can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 flows down the left side from the approximate center in the left-right direction and reaches the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500, the peripheral wall 2503 descends from the left side. It is guided to the area on the left. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters and passes through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 disposed on the left side of the center character 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402, the detection signal is Based on the main control board 4100, the normal random number generation means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), Normal symbols extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) elapse and based on normal random numbers (normal lottery results) are stop displayed (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits either red or green) . The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table in the normal symbol variation pattern selection unit 4204.

  Specifically, in the case where the drawn normal random number is a "normal hit" random number, stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the drawn normal random number is a "normal loss" random number In this case, the stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (normal symbol display 1189 emits light in red). Then, when the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 closing the second start opening 2102 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), The game ball can be awarded to the second starting opening 2102.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start opening 2102 may be changed according to the game state, for example, when controlled to a non-short time state The fluctuation time may be changed to a short time or the expansion time may be changed to a long time as compared with the case where control is performed in the short time state. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by selecting it after replacing it with a table different for each gaming state it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, although an area where game balls can flow down is provided from the center to the left on the upper side of the center character 2500, the center to the right along the outer periphery of the game area 1100. And enter the second game area 2551 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the arc-shaped passage extending downward, and then from the first outlet 2578 to the top of the shelf 2601a of the front right movable effect unit 2600. , And is supplied to the upper right of the attacker unit 2100 below the stage 2510 in the gaming area 1100 to flow down the gaming area 1100. Thus, in the normal gaming state, when the game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center character 2500 without having an opportunity to enter the gate member 2400 or the warp entrance 2504. The movement of the game ball is less enjoyable as it decreases.

  Therefore, the player appropriately adjusts the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down the area on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center character 2500, making the game ball strong against dark clouds It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest by suppressing the game operation such as throwing in and enjoying the game by the operation of the handle device 500 inherent to the pachinko machine 1. In addition, even if the rotation amount of the handle device 500 is not appropriately adjusted, the game ball can be easily hit into the area on the right side of the center role 2500 simply by operating to hit hard, so the second game area 2551 When the second large winning opening 2552 is in the open state, it becomes easy to aim at the second large winning opening 2552, and make sure that the second large winning opening 2552 accepts the game ball to entertain the player. It is possible to

  By the way, in this example, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is being changed and displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol during the change is stopped and the ordinary generated and extracted earlier Until the result of the random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402 is temporarily stored by the ordinary symbol storage means 4202 and its display is performed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of memories, and in this example, it is possible to store and display up to four. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball which has been driven into the game area 1100 and flowed down the left side of the center character 2500 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center character 2500 by the shelf 2301 a of the front left movable effect unit 2300 It is supposed to be. Then, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 2104 arranged below the center character 2500 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3071, the main control board 4100 pays out control board 4110 based on the detection signal. To the predetermined payout command, the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are the upper tray 301. It is supposed to be paid out.

  In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the second large winning opening 2552 In this case, it is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction of the game area 1100, and is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1232 (1151). In addition, even if the game ball is won in any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the special winning opening 2103, and the second large winning opening 2552, the gaming balls that have won are It is discharged to the rear lower side of the game board 4 without being returned into the area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 opened on the left side of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. Then, the gaming balls supplied onto the stage 2510 roll on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, are mainly discharged forward from the guiding surface 2511, and are returned to the inside of the gaming area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2410 enters the chance entrance 2514 which opens to the rear side at the approximate center in the horizontal direction, the gaming area 1100 starts from the chance exit 2515 which opens immediately above the first starting opening 2101. It is discharged inward and can be received to the first starting port 2101 with high probability. Then, when the gaming ball is received by the first starting opening 2101 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls are received from the winning ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 etc. Is to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103 are arranged in the vertical direction, the gaming ball released from the stage 2510 is It is likely to be accepted by the first starting opening 2101 etc. with high probability, and when the second starting opening 2102 or the large winning opening 2103 is acceptable, it is highly likely to be accepted when the gaming ball is released from the stage 2510 Therefore, not only the first starting opening 2101 but also the second starting opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 can be made to have a sense of expectation regarding the reception of the game ball and to enhance the interest.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2401 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402 and the "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, the second starting opening 2102 is closed. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win, and the game ball is accepted by the second start opening 2102 and detected by the second start opening sensor 2127 when the winning is possible, main control A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 301 from the winning ball device 740 via the substrate 4100 and the like.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting opening sensor 2127, the first starting The first special random number generation means 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number in the mouth 2101, and the second start random number 2102 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number by the second special random number generation means 4222. It will be. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started based on the extracted special random number, The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result.

  In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode indicating "big hit", the opening / closing member of the attacker unit 2100 according to the big hit mode A big hit game state occurs in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the 2106 or the second attacking unit 2550 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and in the meantime, the game ball is won to the big winning opening 2103 or the second big winning opening 2402 , Have become able to get more game balls. In addition, when one game ball wins the big winning opening 2103 or the second big winning hole 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the winning ball device 740. .

  In addition, in the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests "small hit", the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 has a predetermined pattern. A small hit gaming state which opens and closes is generated, and more game balls can be obtained by winning a game ball to the large winning opening 2103 during that time. It should be noted that, when one game ball wins the big winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  In addition, also in these 1st starting opening 2101 and 2nd starting opening 2102, the 1st special symbol indicator 1185 and the 2nd special symbol display as well as the fluctuation indication of the normal design by passage of the game sphere to gate component 2400 The game ball wins in the starting opening 2101 and 2102 when the special symbol in the special symbol in the container 1186 is fluctuatingly displayed or the special symbol such as in the big hit gaming state can not be variably displayed, and the first starting opening sensor 3022, second starting The first special random number or the first special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting opening sensor 2127 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible when the opening sensor 2127 detects it or The second special random number is stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 and the display thereof is put on hold, the memory The number of special random numbers, and displays in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 consists of two LEDs, and the combination of the light-emitting states of the light-off, light-on, and blinking LEDs indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. When the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. In addition, the second special random number stored (held) by the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold and digest unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 Are to be carried out (digested). That is, withholding of the lottery result relating to the second starting port 2102 and the third starting port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to holding of the lottery result relating to the first starting port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the special random number of the first special random number or the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting opening sensor 2127 is determined in advance as a big hit determination table. It is determined whether the special random number is “losing”, “small hit” or “big hit” by checking with the first start opening sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first start opening 2101. The second symbol random number extracted based on the detection signal detected by the second start opening sensor 2127 by the first symbol random number extracted based on the detected detection signal and the start winning to the second start opening 2102 By checking the "big hit", whether it is "10R big hit" or "15R big hit", and further, "probably short time without a hit", "a real time hit", "a short time hit", "a real time short Ri "and the like is adapted to also be determined.

  And, when the special lottery result based on the first special random number or the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 is "small hit" The main control board 4100 closes the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 as an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds; approximately 0.5 seconds in this example). The opening and closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result based on the extracted first special random number and the second special random number is "big hit", the main control board 4100 is opened or closed member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second After opening the second opening / closing member 2553 of the unit 2550, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds for long opening, about 0.5 seconds similar to a small hit for short opening) elapses, or If a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy one of the conditions for winning the large winning opening 2103, an open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the open / close member 2106 If the "10R big hit" is repeated 10 times, if it is a "15R big hit" it is repeated 15 times each. , It adapted to generate a favorable jackpot gaming state to the player. In addition, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, the "big hit" exchanges the big hit determination table with one of the big hit determination table at the high probability and the big hit determination table at the low probability according to the gaming state determined by the symbol random number. It is supposed to be.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number which are extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102 and the third starting opening 2415 In addition to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 fluctuatingly displayed (according to the special lottery result), the special random number (also in the liquid crystal display device 1900) An effect image corresponding to the special lottery result is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, each decoration is displayed in such a manner that a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol and right decorative symbol) Variation display of the symbol row is started, and then stop display is sequentially displayed (in this example, it is stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed Then, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning combination, after the plurality of decorative symbol rows are variably displayed, the effect image to be stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. In addition, since the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is larger than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It pays attention to the decorative pattern.

  The variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 231). The variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 based on the command according to the lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. ing. In this manner, since the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like controls the variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the player pays particular attention to, a certain one of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100 For one command, a plurality of variation patterns of symbols can be prepared in advance to increase the variation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit 4140, drive motors 3161, 3181, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, based on the command related to the lottery result, in addition to the control of the effect image. The decorative substrates 2153, 2310, 2311, 2511, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501 provided on the game board 4 while appropriately operating 3516, 3556 and drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611, 3711. , 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705, and 3717 are suitably made to emit light, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light-emitting effect.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a flow chart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first performs various registers and RAMs as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100 c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100 c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU 4100 a receives the clear signal at the power on If it is determined that there is, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in the various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not illustrated, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is performed to save information (for example, various flags etc.) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup processing without executing the initialization processing (step S1). And execute recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100 c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set in the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol Reach in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (the fluctuation time) required for the fluctuation display control of (A state in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is not displayed in a stopped state, or the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all synchronized to be the same symbol Reach random number provided for the lottery process whether or not to be selected, and a random number for the lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number One symbol random number, the second symbol random number), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such like, random numbers to be subjected (usually random) in accordance lottery processing operation triggered become per the Toraku of the movable piece 2105.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2101 is started, the second start opening 2102 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 197 (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2402, the first starting opening sensor 3070, the second starting opening sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning opening sensor 3071 It is input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated Counter operation is performed.

  And after updating the random number in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the above special symbol Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a first special symbol process flag, Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on (2) special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process concerning a hit when the movable piece 2105 becomes an operation trigger. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is such that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2105 becomes higher in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 10R big hit gaming state). It becomes a structure which performs a lottery process (what is called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol When the hit occurs, the open time of the movable piece 2105 is extended, and the number of times the movable piece 2105 is opened is increased to realize such a short time.

  When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs the special symbol process process as a process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process of outputting data such as contact information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) or the like supplied to the hole management computer next as the process of step S18. .

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3070, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning port sensor 3071 and the like as the process of step S19. When the signal is in the on state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signal is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a mounted on the payout control board 1186 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 to pay out the prize balls to the player.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process of checking the increase and decrease of the number of starting memories as the process of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3070. The first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the first start opening 2101 is entered) (step S31) A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number under the condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2127 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2102 is present) (step S33) The second starting opening passage processing such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S40) is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is "15R (right) probability variation big hit (specific 1)" (Right) When it comes to a mode that suggests definite variation big hit (specification 2) or "15R (right) rank up certainty variation large hit (specification 3)", the above 2nd big winning opening according to 15R or 10R big hit gaming state When the 2552 is controlled to be in the open state and it becomes a mode that suggests “10R (left) probability variation big hit (specific 4)” and “15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit (specific 5)” The big winning opening 2103 is controlled to the open state according to the 10R big hit gaming state of the 10R big hit game of the short opening when it becomes the mode which suggests “10R (left) latent probability change big hit (specific 6)” State In response to execute a process of controlling the open state the special winning opening 2103.

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S36), the small hit execution flag If is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small hitting control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes the mode that suggests "small hit", A process of controlling the big winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed according to the small hit gaming state similar to the 10R big hit gaming state which is open for a short time.

  Further, if neither the big hit running flag nor the small hit running flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38) on condition that it is "0" (step S37) (second special symbol hold) On the condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), it depends on the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 3070 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2101, as shown in FIG. 199 In step S41, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of the above-mentioned first special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as each random number acquired in this way Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S42 to S44.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a performs a big hit or a small hit on the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not to be the type of big hit if it is a big hit, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 After the effect pre-determination process of determining prior determination information such as before starting variable display according to the start winning combination (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start port passing process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2127 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. 200. In step S51, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of reservations of the above-mentioned 2nd special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as each random number thus acquired Store in

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S52 to S54.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect prior determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the effect advance determination processing, the advance determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether it will be a big hit or a small hit by comparing it with the fluctuating random number, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, reach production as a game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 if it is not a big hit or a small hit. To identify the type of game effect to be executed (step S61).

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage process, a high probability flag indicating that control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the first special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value and the first It is specified whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing with one special random number. This high probability big hit judgment value (3819-3918) is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A) to be described later) and compared with the first special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) of low probability and low probability is set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A) at low probability described later) and is used as a jackpot judgment value to be compared with the first special random number. The same random number is used. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table in step S61, whether or not to be a big hit is accurately identified, and "big hit 1 to 12" to be a big hit as predetermination information, not a big hit It can be classified as either "losing" or "reach 1 to 4".

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage processing, the same disturbance is generated regardless of whether the high probability flag is set or not. It is also specified whether or not it will be a small hit by comparing the small hit judgment value set in the numerical value with the first special random number. These high probability or low probability small hit judgment values (3800-3818) are set in the high probability or low probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 206A) to be described later, and the first special random number is determined. The same random value as the small hit judgment value to be compared with. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a small hit, and classified into "big hit 12" that includes a small hit as the predetermination information. be able to.

  Also, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that control of a high probability state is being performed is If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value It is determined whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing the second special random number with the second special random number. This high probability big hit judgment value (3819-3918) is the same as the big hit judgment value to be compared with the second special random number set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A) described later). The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) of low probability is a numerical value and the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 206A) at a low probability described later and compared with the second special random number. The same random number is used. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a big hit, and "big hit 1 to 12" to be a big hit as the prior determination information. It can be classified as either "losing" or "reach 1 to 4".

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when it is determined in step S61 that the big win is identified by comparing the first special random number and the prior determination table, the determination value indicating which big hit The type of the big hit is identified by comparing the and the first symbol random number. Specifically, the determination value (64-175) indicating that the jackpot of the specific 1 is to be set is a determination value to be set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) to be described later and compared with the first symbol random number. The judgment value (0-63) which is made the same random value as the judgment value which shows that it makes the big hit of the specific 1 among them, and shows that it makes it as the specified 2 to 5 or the non specified big hit is the symbol determination table (described later) Among the determination values set in FIG. 206C (see (C)) and compared with the first symbol random number, it is a random number value identical to the determination value indicating that it is specified as specified 2 to 5 or non-specified big hit. The judgment value (176 to 199) indicating that the jackpot is to be made is the jackpot of specific 6 of the judgment values set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) to be described later and compared with the first symbol random number. The same random value as the judgment value that indicates

  Moreover, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be made, a plurality of reach effects are produced by comparing a change value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. Specify which reach effect to perform and become a big hit. Specifically, in the big hit of the specific 1, the determination value (0-4) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is the same as the determination value indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the fluctuating random number It is considered as a random number value, and it is indicated that a super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as weak SP reach) with a low probability of big hit expected (the degree of expectation that the big hit mode is displayed, ie the big hit gaming state) is performed. The value (5-29) is a random number value identical to the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with low expectation of big hit is judged among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random number, and the super reach effect with high degree of jackpot expectation (Hereafter, this is also referred to as a strong SP reach) A judgment value (30-216) indicating that a specific super reach effect (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is to be executed. Among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random numbers, the judgment value is the same as the judgment value indicating execution of the high reach expectability super reach effect other than the specific super reach effect, and the super reach is the high hit probability The judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the effects is the same disturbance as the judgment value indicating that a particular super reach effect is to be performed among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random number. It is considered as a numerical value.

  Further, in the specific 2 to 5 or non-specific big hit, the determination value (0-4) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is the determination value indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the fluctuating random number. Judgment value (5-29) which is considered to be the same random number value and indicates that the super reach effect with low hit probability is to be executed is the super reach effect with low hit probability among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. The judgment value (30-216) which is set as a random value identical to the judgment value indicating that it is to be executed, and indicates that the super reach effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed other than a specific super reach effect is compared with the variable random number. The judgment value is the same random value as the judgment value indicating that the super reach effect with a high degree of expectation for big hit other than the specific super reach effect is executed, and the big hit A judgment value (217-240) indicating that a particular super reach effect is to be executed among super reach effects having a high degree of waiting indicates that a particular super reach effect is to be executed among judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  Also, in the specific 6 big hit, the judgment value (0-89) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is a random value identical to the judgment value indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuating random numbers. And a judgment value (90-189) indicating that super reach production with low jackpot expectation is to be performed indicates executing super reach production with low jackpot expectation among judgment values compared with the fluctuating random numbers. A judgment value (190-216) which is a random value identical to the judgment value and indicates that a super reach effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed except for a specific super reach effect is a judgment value to be compared with the fluctuation random number. It is considered as the same random value as the judgment value which shows performing super reach production with high expectation which is other than specific super reach production, and it is big hit expectation degree A determination value (217-240) indicating that a particular super reach effect is to be executed among high super reach effects is a determination value indicating that a particular super reach effect is to be performed among the determination values to be compared with the fluctuating random number and The same random number is used.

  For this reason, by comparing the first symbol random number and the prior determination table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number and the prior determination table, the type of the big hit is accurately identified, and from the normal reach as the prior determination information Specific 1 big hit as "big hit 1", specific 1 big hit from weak SP reach "big hit 2", specific big hit from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "big hit 3" , "Big hit 4" as a specific one big hit from a specific strong SP reach, "big hit 5" that includes a specific 2-5 or non-specific big hit from a normal reach, a specific 2-5 from a weak SP reach or non "Big hit 6" that includes a specific big hit, "big hit 7" that includes a specific 2-5 or non-specific big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, a specific strong SP “Big hit 8” that includes specified 2 to 5 or non-specified big hit from Ji, “big hit 9” that sets the big hit for specified 6 from normal reach, and “big hit 10” that sets the big hit for weak SP reach It can be classified as either "big hit 11" as a specific 6 big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, or "big hit 12" as a specific 6 big hit from a specific strong SP reach.

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that a big hit will be made by comparing the second special random number and the prior determination table, a determination value indicating which big hit And the second symbol random number to identify the type of the jackpot. Specifically, the determination value (64 to 199) indicating that the jackpot of the specific 1 is to be made is a determination value to be set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) to be described later and compared with the second symbol random number. The judgment value (0-63) which is made the same random value as the judgment value which shows that it makes the big hit of the specific 1 among them, and shows that it makes it as the specified 2 to 5 or the non specified big hit is the symbol determination table (described later) Among the determination values set in FIG. 206C (refer to FIG. 206C) and compared with the second symbol random number, it is a random value identical to the determination value indicating specification 2 to 5 or non-specific big hit. In addition, when comparing the second symbol random number and the prior determination table in step S61, a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed as in the case of comparing the first symbol random number and the prior determination table described above. By comparing the random number with the variable random number, it is specified which reach effect is to be performed among the plurality of reach effects to be a big hit. For this reason, by comparing the second symbol random number and the prior determination table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number and the prior determination table, the type of the big hit is accurately identified, and the "big hit" is made as the prior determination information. It can be classified into any of 1 "to" big hit 12 ".

  Also, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when a high probability flag indicating that control of a high probability state is being executed is set when it is specified that it is out, reach is displayed. Specify whether to display reach by comparing reach reach value at the time of probability change and reach random number, which indicates that the time is displayed, and the time-shortening flag indicating that control of time-shortening state (low probability time-shorting state) is executed If it is set, it is specified whether the reach is displayed or not by comparing the reach judgment value at the short time indicating reach display with the reach random number, and it is determined whether the reach is displayed, and the high probability flag or the time short flag is set. In the case where it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, whether or not the reach is to be displayed is specified by comparing the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0) at the time of this probability change is set to the same reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. The reach judgment value (0-5) at the time is set as a reach judgment value to be compared with the reach random number set in the reach judgment table (refer to FIG. 206 (B)) at the time of short. The reach judgment value (0-6) at the time is set to the same random judgment value as the reach judgment value set in the normal reach judgment table (see FIG. 206 (B) described later) and compared with the reach random number . Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether the reach effect is to be executed as the game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 when it does not become a big hit. It can be classified into any of “reach” in which reach is not displayed (information for performing reach effect) and “reach 1 to 4” in which the effect is indicated (execution of effect effect).

  In addition, the reach judgment value (0-5) at the time of short time and the reach judgment value (0-6) at the normal time include the same judgment value (0) as the reach judgment value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and reach random number match, it is classified whether reach is displayed (execution of reach effect) in any of the gaming states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is specified in any of the gaming states at the time of probability change, time reduction, and normal time whether reach effect is to be executed as a game effect by the liquid crystal display device 1900. can do.

  Further, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed is compared with the change random number. Specify the type of game effect to be executed by doing. Specifically, the judgment value (0-163) indicating that normal reach effect is to be executed is set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number The judgment value (164-222), which is a random value identical to the judgment value indicating that the execution is to be performed and indicates that the super reach effect with a low degree of expectation for big hit is to be performed, is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) Among the judgment values set in) and compared with the fluctuating random number, the judgment value is the same as the judgment value indicating execution of the super reach effect with low expectation of big hit, and specified among the super reach effects with high degree of hit expectation Judgment values (223-235) indicating that other than the super reach effect of are executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. The judgment value set in) is the same random value as the judgment value indicating execution of super reach effect with high expectation for big hit other than specific super reach effect among judgment values to be compared with the variable random number, and the big hit expectation degree Judgment values (236-240) indicating that a particular super reach effect is to be executed among the high super reach effects are determined to be set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later and compared with the change random number Of the values, the same random value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be performed is used. Therefore, by comparing the variation random number and the prior determination table in step S61, the type type of the game effect to be executed is accurately identified, and the normal reach effect is executed as the prior determination information, "reach 1" "Leach 2" which performs low super reach production, "Leach 3" which performs super reach production with high expectation of big hit (except for specific super reach production), super reach production with high expectation of big hit (specific super reach production ) Can be classified into any of "reach 4". Then, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it can be classified as any of “reach 1” to “reach 4” as the prior determination information.

  As described above, as a result of comparison between the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A) and the acquired random number (special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) If it does not, the reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, or prior judgment information such as the type of game effect to be executed is specified As shown in FIG. 202 (B), the prior determination information is classified into any of 17 types: "losing", "big hit 1" to "big hit 12", and "reach 1" to "reach 4".

  Then, in the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55), the identified pre-determination information (whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit The reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed, and the type of the acquired special random number (either the first special random number or the second special random number) , And the number-of-holds command corresponding to the number-of-holds (value of the number-of-holds counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. For example, in the effect prior determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified prior determination information and the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the number of first special symbol held A first special symbol hold number command corresponding to (the value of the first special hold number counter) is set (step S62). In the fourth digit of the hold number command (for example, 620XH when the prior determination information regarding the first special symbol is “losing”), when the hold number = 1, X = 2 and the hold number = 2 When X = 3 and Pending number = 3, X = 4 is substituted, and when Pending number = 4 and X = 5. For this reason, by transmitting the number-of-retentions command from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010, the start port (one of the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102) where the start winning is generated, the start In addition to the number of reservations stored corresponding to the mouth, whether the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the starting winning combination generated is a big hit or small hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, big hit or When it does not become a small hit, reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, or prior determination information such as a mode type of the game effect to be executed starts variable display according to the start winning. The peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 can be grasped before.

  In this example, the random number is the same as the jackpot judgment value of the advance judgment table and the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the big hit decision value of the prior decision table includes only a part of the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table, or a part or all of the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table and the big hit decision value of the big hit decision table It may be configured to include a number of random values, and the degree of possibility of becoming a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of outlier judgment values (which may include a small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value and the big hit judgment value can be respectively discriminated as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group The high probability random number determining means, wherein the ratio to the above outlier judgment value of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value which is made distinguishable as above, is set higher than the ratio of the above big hit judgment table where the above big hit winning probability is decided. Of the random numbers obtained by the means, the first special random number and the second special random number are classified as either the above-mentioned out-of-range determination value or the above-mentioned big-off determination value Value of the high probability random number provided to the same judgment while belonging to the high probability random number group in which the big hit judgment value and the out judgment value are mixed. The pseudo probability precedent judging means capable of executing an advance judgment on the degree of expectation (pseudo winning probability) related to the big hit in each of the judgment processing in the pending state by judging whether there is any. The degree of expectation regarding the winning of the big hit may be determined in advance by the pseudo probability preceding determination means.

  In this way, by providing means for determining the high probability random number having the big hit judgment value and the negative judgment value mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the success result of the big hit judgment still in the pending state may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional effect structure excluding the above, with regard to the degree of expectation (pseudo-wining probability) relating to the above-mentioned big hit corresponding to the mixture ratio of the big hit judgment value and the falling judgment value in the high probability random number determination means The precedent determination can be made executable. For example, prior to the execution of the above-mentioned big hit judgment (digestion of the judgment processing), the prior judgment that the success random number provided for the big hit judgment is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (specific hit judgment value) was not made When the decision processing based on a random value (a value belonging to a low probability random number group which is paired with a high probability random number group) which is not the precedently determined special hit judgment value is expected, the expectation pertaining to the jackpot winning It is determined that the degree (pseudo-wining probability) is lower than the above-described jackpot expectation (wining probability) (pseudo-decided winning probability).

  According to the prior determination method for such a high probability random number group, even when the specific determination process is put on hold, the big hit determination is maintained in the unexecuted state (hold). The anticipation degree (pseudo-wining probability) can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display according to the hold digestion. Will be

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process processing (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like is performed on the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)
5. The first special symbol display mode 1185 is displayed as the first special symbol display 1185 when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control suspension of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the above-mentioned processing of step S1 (see FIG. 197).

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 204, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the processing of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down and the first special symbol storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored. A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 206A if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short state) (step S111) The jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 206A is selected (step S113), and the selection is made. The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 206A is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) and short time state (low probability time short state)) The jackpot determination table for low probability used for the game and the jackpot determination table for high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short time state, high probability time short state) are provided. Then, in the jackpot determination table at low probability, as in the above-described prior determination table, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the 10 types of first special random numbers have been jackpotted, and the 19 types of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the player has won the hit, and to match the out determination value indicating that the 3890 types of first special random numbers are the above. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In this low probability big hit judgment table, like the above-mentioned prior judgment table, it matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that 10 kinds of second special random numbers are won as a big hit, and 3909 kinds of second special random numbers deviate from the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range determination value indicating that

  Also, in the big hit determination table at high probability, like the above-mentioned prior determination table, 100 types of first special random numbers including the first special random number identical to the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at low probability Matches the jackpot determination value, matches the small hitting judgment value indicating that the 19 kinds of first special random numbers are won in the small hitting, and the 3800 kinds of first special random numbers match the losing judgment value. One special random number is associated with each other. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state), when the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability short time state And 10) of the short time state (low probability time short state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the high probability big hit judgment table to be referenced to compare with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In the high probability big hit determination table, as in the above-mentioned prior determination table, 100 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and to match with the falling judgment value indicating that the 3909 types of second special random numbers are the above.

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S115) ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is hit big is set, it ends processing (step S116), the 1st special read out at step S102 of the selected big hit judgment table and the 1st special symbol normal processing If it is determined as a small hit as a result of comparison with the random number (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is won for the small hit is set, and the process is ended (step S118). The result of comparison between the selected big hit judgment table and the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing If it is determined that the off compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 206 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 206 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and is a probability variation used when the gaming state is a probability variation (high probability non-short status, high probability short status). Reach determination table at the time, reach determination table at short time to be used when the gaming state is short time (low probability time short state), and normal reach determination to be used when the gaming state is normal time (normal state) And a table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability variation, similarly to the above-mentioned prior determination table, a reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number matches reach indicating that the reach random number does not reach 238 The reach random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above.

  In addition, in the reach determination table at the time of short time, similarly to the above-described prior determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including reach random numbers identical to the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the time of probability variation reach The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the value and to match the reach determination value indicating that the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the time-short time (low probability time-short state) than in the probability variation (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including reach random numbers identical to the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table at the probability change time and the short time are reached similarly to the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the indicated reach determination value and to match the reach determination value indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time (low probability time short state).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). Sets a reach flag indicating that it is a reach, and the process ends (step S120b).

  FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 207, The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 206 (C). (Step S122) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 206C, in the symbol determination table, each determination result (specific 1 15R (right) positive variation big hit, specific 2 10R (right right) positive variation big hit, identification 3 as in the above-mentioned prior determination table. The 15R (right) rank up probability variation hit, the 4 specific 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the 5 specific 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, the specific 6 10R (left) probability probability variation big hit, non specific 10R (left) Usually, the pattern random number (the first pattern random number, the second pattern random number) is stored in a form associated with the symbol random number). The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
1. The 15R big hit game state (the opening and closing pattern for opening and closing the second open / close member 2553 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds)) using the second open / close member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, and after the end of the 15R big hit game state The specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit which controls to the high probability time short state until it becomes a big hit again. The 10R big hit game state (the opening and closing pattern for opening and closing the second open / close member 2553 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)) using the second open / close member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, and after the end of the 10R big hit game state Specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit which controls to the high probability time short state until it becomes big hit again 3. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if it is finished in the 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attack unit 2550, but after that the big hit gaming state is continued and the 15 R big hit gaming state as a total Control (rank up) to become, after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state until the big hit again to control to the high probability time reduction state specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit The 10R big hit game state (the open and close pattern for opening and closing the open / close member 2106 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)) using the open / close member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, until the 10R big hit game state ends until the big hit again Specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit controlled to high probability time short state 5. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if it is finished in the 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, but it is controlled to become the 15 R big hit gaming state as a total by continuing the big hit gaming state thereafter. (5 ranks up), and after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state, until the big hit again becomes the high probability time and short state control of the specified 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit. The game ball controls the 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in such a manner that the game ball is hard to enter, and controls the high probability non-short state until the big hit again after the 10R big hit gaming state is over In the liquid crystal display device 1400, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game is in a high probability state. Control to 10R big hit gaming state using the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) a predetermined number of times (50 times) Among the seven types of jackpots of non-specific 10R (left) jackpots that control the low probability time-short state until execution is determined to be any jackpot.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 15R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank-up probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 6 10R (left left) probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal distribution of the judgment value is set for the big hit In contrast, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the specific 1 15R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 4 10R (left) positive variation big hit, the specific 5 15R (left) rank up positive variation big hit, non The distribution of judgment values is set for a specific 10R (left) normal big hit.

  Further, in this example, when the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, and the specific 3 15R (right) rank increase probability variation big hit, the second attacking unit 2550 While the big hit gaming state is controlled to open and close the two opening and closing members 2553, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, specific 6 10R (left) latency probability variation In the case of a big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, the big hit gaming state is controlled so as to open and close the opening and closing member 2106 of the above-mentioned attacker unit 2100. Therefore, during control of the jackpot gaming state of opening and closing the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attack unit 2550, the center role 2500 such that many gaming balls win in the second large winning opening 2552 Aiming at the right side of the game ball to fire (so-called "right-handed"). On the other hand, during the control of the jackpot gaming state of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 of the attack unit 2100, the game ball aiming at the left side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls win the big winning opening 2103 Must be fired (so-called "left-handed").

  As described above, during the control of the jackpot gaming state of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 of the attack unit 2100, the game ball will be shot at the left side of the center role 2500 but the center feature 2500 In the game area 1100 on the left side of the game board, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the front of the game panel 1200 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball contacts the obstacle nails to Various movements are given to flow down. Therefore, even if the game ball is hit on the left side of the center role 2500 aiming at the large winning opening 2103 when opening the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacking unit 2100, a winning in the large winning opening 2103 Not limited to this, gaming balls that have not won the special winning opening 2103 are discharged to the outside from an out port 1232 (1151) provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the gaming area 1100.

  On the other hand, during control of the jackpot gaming state of opening and closing the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attack unit 2550, the game ball will be shot at the right side of the center role 2500, but the center role In the second game area 2551 on the right side of 2500, no obstacle nail is implanted on the front of the game panel 1200. In addition, when the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attacher unit 2550 is opened due to the structure of the game board 4, the game ball is hit on the right side of the center character 2500 by aiming at the second large winning opening 2552 The second big winning opening 2552 is always to be won. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened and closed, the game balls hit in the second game area 2551 are wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1232 (1151) ) The game ball comes to be efficiently won in the second large winning opening 2552 compared to the large winning opening 2103 in the big hit gaming state of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 of the above-mentioned attachment unit 2100, and a short time The jackpot game state can be digested with.

  Moreover, in this example, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit gaming state in the specific 1 to 5 and the non specific and the specific 6 (time to open and close the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100) or The opening time of the second large winning opening 2552 (the time for opening and controlling the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attachment unit 2550) is made different. Specifically, when specified 1 to 5 and a non-specified big hit, the large winning opening 2103 per round or the second large winning opening 2552 is in a long open state where the opening time is 30 seconds. In contrast to the control, when it becomes a specific six 10R (left) latent probability big hit, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is made extremely short of 0.05 seconds than the long opening state. It controls to short open state. In addition, also when it becomes a small hit, it controls to the short open state which makes the open time of the said big winning a prize mouth 2103 per round in small hit game state 0.05 seconds. As described above, when the specified six 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is too short. Even if the opening control is recognized, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short open state in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the game ball hardly wins in the big winning opening 2103, and unlike in the long open state control, many game balls Can not expect to earn

  Further, in this example, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the gaming state are prepared, and when the gaming state is switched with the big hit (including when the gaming state is not switched with the small hit) The production mode is also shifted. In this effect mode, a dedicated game effect (a reach effect or an effect during a big hit game, etc.) is set in each effect mode, and when the effect mode shifts, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a liquid crystal display corresponding to each effect mode. The effect display by the background color of the device 1900 and the characters (including the aspect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the impression of the game is changed into a gully in each of the effect modes. Specifically, when controlled to the low probability non-short state (normal state), the normal mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to the blue background color) is set, and the high probability time short state (probability variation) Mode is set to the positive variation mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a red background color), and when controlled to the low probability time short state (time short state) (In this example, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a yellow background color) and the high probability non-short state (positive change state) or the low probability non short state (normal state) is controlled In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a light blue background color). In this manner, the player can distinguish which effect mode is controlled by visually recognizing the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, a predetermined mode (a character etc. may be sufficient as a character etc. corresponding to each production mode may be sufficient as a liquid crystal display device 1900 so that a player can discriminate | determine which production mode it is controlled. May be displayed.

  And, in the normal mode according to the low probability non-short state, the specific 1 15R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank up positive variation big hit, the specific 4 In the case of 10R (left) probability variation big hit, as it is controlled to high probability time short state after the end of the big hit gaming state transition from normal mode to positive variation mode, non specific 10R (left) normal big hit In the case of becoming, when it is controlled to the low probability time short state after the end of the big hit gaming state, it moves from the normal mode to the time saving mode, and becomes the specific six 10R (left) latencies certainty big hit or small hit In such a case, the control mode is changed from the normal mode to the probability change latent mode as it is controlled to the high probability non-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state or to the low probability non short state after the end of the small hit gaming state. It is. Also, in the case of the probability 1 in the definite variation mode according to the high probability time reduction state, the specific variation 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the identification 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the identification 5 15R (left) rank increase probability variation big hit Continues to change to the high probability time short state again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and continues to be in a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, the jackpot is low after the jackpot gaming state is over The mode is changed from the indeterminate mode to the time mode in accordance with control to the probability time short state.

  In the above-mentioned odd change mode, if the specific 4 10R (left) positive variation big hit, the specific 5 15R (left) rank up positive variation big hit, and the non-specific 10 R (left) normal big hit, until the start of the big hit gaming state It is difficult to determine whether or not to control to high probability time short state (probable change state) after the end of the big hit gaming state, and starts the big hit gaming state using the opening and closing member 2106 of the above-mentioned attacker unit 2100 As a game effect in the big hit game state which is executed until the game state ends, a definite change bonus effect of whether to control to a high probability time short state after the end of the big hit game state is executed. In this definite variation bonus effect, for example, the player operates the pressing operation unit 405, and the effect of determining whether the main character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 succeeds in judging the villain character is performed a plurality of times (four times ) If the specified 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and the specified 5 15 R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, the main character judges the villain character until multiple effects are executed. In the case of a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, the main character is a villain in all of a plurality of renditions while it is controlled to a high probability time and short state after the end of the big hit gaming state by success. By failing to judge the character, after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to low probability time short state. As described above, in the definite variation bonus effect, there is an opportunity for the main character to succeed in judging the bad character, since the effect of judging whether the main character succeeds in judging the bad character is executed plural times (four times). It is possible to increase the expectation of being increased and controlled to the high probability time reduction state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  Also, in the normal mode described above, when it becomes a specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and a specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, 10R big hit gaming state or 15R big hit by the start of the big hit gaming state It is difficult to determine which of the gaming states is controlled, and the big hit gaming state using the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attachment unit 2550 is started, but it is executed by the end of the 10 R big hit gaming state As a game effect during the big hit gaming state to be played, a rank up effect of whether to control continuously from the end of the 10 R big hit gaming state to the 15 R big hit gaming state is executed. In this rank-up effect, for example, an effect of whether or not the object detection means 2530 succeeds in defeating the predetermined number of enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by detecting the movement of the player's hand If it is a specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state continuously until the 15 R big hit gaming state by succeeding in the defeat of a predetermined number of enemy characters. In the case of the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, it is controlled to end the big hit gaming state in the 10R big hit gaming state by failing to destroy a predetermined number of enemy characters.

  In the normal mode described above, when the specified 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and the non-specified 10R (left) normal big hit, the 10R big hit gaming state after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state It is difficult to determine whether to control to high probability time short state (probable change state), and start 10R big hit gaming state using the opening and closing member 2106 of the above-mentioned attacker unit 2100, but until 10R big hit gaming state is over As a game effect during the big hit game state to be executed, the probability change challenge effect of whether to control to the high probability time short state after the end of the 10R big hit game state is executed. In this definite variation challenge effect, for example, the effect of whether or not the door is successfully opened is operated by rotating the dial operation unit 401 as instructed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the specific four 10R is performed. (Left) In the case of a probability variation big hit, when it is non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit while it is controlled to high probability time short state after the end of 10R big hit gaming state by succeeding in opening the door. In the event of failure to open the door, control is made to the low probability time-short state after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the above-mentioned normal mode, when it becomes a specific 6's 10R (left) latent probability change big hit, it is controlled to a high probability non-short state until it becomes a big hit again after the 10R big hit gaming state is over. In the case of a small hit, since the gaming state at the time of the small hit is continuously controlled after the end of the small hitting game state, the small hit when it is controlled to a low probability non-short time state If it becomes, it will be controlled to the low probability non-short time state after the end of the small hit gaming state set equal to the 10R big hit gaming state. In this way, when it becomes a specific six 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit, after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or after the small hit gaming state is both controlled to non-time saving state However, as the effect mode executed after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or the end of the small hit gaming state, the probability variation latent mode which is difficult to determine whether or not it is the high probability state is executed. In addition, in the definite variation latent mode, two types of presentation mode of definite variation latency A mode and definite variation latency B mode are set, and when entering into definite variation latency A mode is higher than when entering into definite variation latency B mode The degree of expectation which is a probability state is set to be high. That is, when it is controlled to a low probability non-short time condition and it becomes a specific probability of 10R (left) latency probability big hit, the probability variation latent A mode and the probability variation latency B mode Among them, the probability of deciding on the latent variation A mode is increased.

  In the above-mentioned probability variation latent A mode, for example, the object detection unit 2530 detects the movement of the player's hand, and moves away from the enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 one after another, thereby raising the rank, the friend character Of the success or failure of rescue of the character, and in the case of a big hit, by succeeding in rescue of the character of the ally, control to the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit On the other hand, when it comes off, control is performed so as to only repel enemy characters one after another or to fail to rescue allied characters. Further, in the above-mentioned probability variation latent B mode, for example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect of whether or not the ally character succeeds in catching the enemy character is executed, and if it becomes a big hit, the ally character The character is controlled to the big hit game state according to the type of the big hit by successfully capturing the enemy character, but when it is lost, the ally character can not find the enemy character, Alternatively, even if an ally character finds an enemy character, control is performed so as to fail in capture.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined that the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, it is determined to be the first special symbol 15 R (right) positive variation big hit symbol, and the specific 2 10 R (right) positive variation variation big hit Is determined to be the first special symbol 10R (right) probability variation big hit symbol, and when it is decided to the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, it is decided to be the first special symbol 15R (right) rank increase probability variation big hit symbol And if it is decided to the specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, it is decided to be the 10R (left) probability variation big hit design of the first special symbol, and if it is decided to the specific 6 10R (left) definite probability variation big hit, the 1st One special symbol is determined as the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit symbol, and when it is determined as the non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, the first special symbol is determined as the 15R normal big hit symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124), and if the small hit flag is set, the variation stop of the first special symbol The mode is determined to be a small hit symbol as an aspect of (step S125), and if the small hit flag is not set, it is determined to be an outlying symbol as a mode at the time of the variation stop of the first special symbol (step S126).

  And after the decision processing for the stop symbol is performed in this way, these lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach out, or out is indicated (stop symbol of the first special symbol) as processing of step S127 The judgment result notification command according to each of the lottery results is set so that the mode of (1) may be sent to the peripheral control board 4010). And after that, this process is complete | finished when the above-mentioned 1st special symbol process flag is updated so that a process may be transfered to said 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) as a process of step S128. The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the specific one 15R (right) positive variation among the big hit When a big hit is specified, it is decided to 15R (right) probability variation big hit symbol (combination of the same decorative symbol of “gold”), at the time of the lapse of the fluctuation time specified from fluctuation pattern command (at the end of game rendition) The display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of “gold” stops fluctuating as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, It is possible to determine that the acquisition of the 15R big hit gaming state using the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 having the largest number of rounds and the easy winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 2103 is decided.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit among the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. If you decide to 10R (right) probability variation big hit design (combination of the same decorative symbol of the odd number of "1", "3", "5", "7"), of the big hit of the specific three 15R (right 15) (right) rank-up probability variation big hit symbols ("1", "3", "5", "7" odd combinations of the same decorative symbols.) 10R (right) Determined to be the same as the probability variation big hit symbol), and control the display of the determined stop symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (when the game effect is ended). Thus, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are displayed. From the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit can not be discriminated either, but the 15R big hit gaming state or 10R big hit using the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 It is possible to determine to control to the high probability state after the end of the gaming state.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies the specific four 10R (left) probability variation big hit among the big hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the case of 10R (left) probability variation big hit design (combination of the same decorative design even number of "2", "4", "6") is decided, 15R (left) rank up probability variation of specific 5 of the big hit When a big hit is specified, it is decided 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit symbol (combination of the same decoration symbols of the even number “2”, “4”, “6”. 10R (left) same as the big variation symbol) If you specified a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit among the big hit, 10R (left) normal big hit symbols ("2", "4", "6" even combination of the same decorative symbol. 10R (Left) Ri symbol and determines common), and displays controls the determined stop symbols at the time lapse of the variation time specified from the variation pattern command (when the game effects termination) in the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the even-numbered same decorative symbols of "2", "4", and "6" as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1 is identified as 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit can not be identified either, the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 It is not possible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the end of these jackpot gaming states until the rendering result in the 10R jackpot gaming state (or 15R jackpot gaming state) using the is derived.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, from the received judgment result notification command, the specific six 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit among the big hit When it is specified, it is decided to be 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit symbol (combination of a predetermined decorative symbol among broken symbols (separating eyes). Specifically, a combination of "357" decorative symbols), small If the hit is specified, it is decided on the small hit symbol (combination of the decorative symbols determined in advance among the missing symbols (broken line). Common to the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit symbol) and specified from the fluctuation pattern command At the time of the elapse of the fluctuation time (when the game effect is ended), display control of the determined stop symbol is carried out on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Thus, when the combination of the decorative symbols of "357" stops fluctuating as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol from the stop symbol of the specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation either large hit or small hit It is not possible to determine whether it is the 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 (the liquid crystal even after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state in the game ball is difficult to enter) Since it is difficult to determine whether the display device 1400 is in the high probability state or not, it is not possible to determine whether to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, as peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900, when the reach is specified from the received judgment result notification command, the symbol is accompanied by reach symbol (A combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same.) A combination of non-identical outlying designs (not identical), but with left and right decorative designs if outliers are specified. Is determined to be non-identical, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (when the game effect is ended), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, and the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state is selected (step S142) If the small hit flag is set (step S143), select the small hit variation pattern table (not shown) according to the current gaming state (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state If the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, that is, if the normal release (the reach effect is not performed), the variation pattern table at the time of release is selected. (Not shown) is selected (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, effect control is performed on the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the determined fluctuation time.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, main control MPU 4100a selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, as in the above-described prior determination table, the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variation random number It is set to decide. Specifically, one of 164 types of variable random numbers coincides with the judgment value (0-163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects whose jackpot expectation is low Match the judgment value (164-222) indicating that the 18 kinds of variable random numbers coincide with the judgment value (223-240) indicating that any of the super reach effects having a high hit probability is performed. As described above, the variable random numbers are associated with one another. Note that the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  In addition, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined as the process of step S151 whether or not the count value of the time counter is "0" when the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Do. Then, if the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time counter (step S152), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined that the time reduction counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, At this point, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 209, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S84) in the processing of step S173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 211, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display 641 as the processing of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol to the liquid crystal display device 1900 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction end flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185). As a result, control of the low probability time-short state is ended, and control of the low probability time-short state (normal state) is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is to be started (step S187). The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that a big hit gaming state is being executed is set and the above-mentioned short time flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is an initial value to the first special symbol normal processing When the process transfer is updated (step S190), this process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and the jackpot type (15R (right) high probability time short, 10R (right) high probability time short, 15R (right) rank up high probability time short Hit per, 10R (left) high probability time per shot, 15R (left) rank up high probability per time short, 10R (left) high probability per hour short, 10R (left) low probability per time short) individually prepared . In step S187, the type of jackpot (15R (right) high probability time short, 10R (right) high probability time short, 15R (right) rank up high probability time short, 10R (left) high probability time short, 15R (left) Big hit start command (15R (right) high probability time short start command, 10R (right) high probability according to rank-up high probability time-short, 10R (left) high probability non-time-short, 10R (left) low probability time-short) Hourly start command, 15R (right) rank up high probability time short start command, 10R (left) high probability time short start command, 15R (left) rank up high probability time short start command, 10R (left) high probability time low Set hit start command, 10R (left) low probability time-short hit start command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating start of the small hit gaming state (step S192). The standby time until the start of the small hit gaming state (the time for displaying the small hit gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S194), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (Step S190), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and in step S195, the small hit start command is set, whereby the effect of the small hit gaming state instructed by the small hit start command is liquid crystal. It is performed by the display device 1900, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

[6. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, a process performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 211, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process of monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set or not is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms lapse monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) Control processing related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  Further, in the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3013 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms elapses from the start of the 16 ms steady process (the command in step S601 Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is performed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of loop processing in the sub main processing and 16 ms stationary processing.

[7. Melody reach]
Next, the notification of the winning types performed during the variable display will be described. In this example, the gaming state (rendering mode) after the end of the jackpot gaming state executed based on the jackpot symbol being derived and displayed in the variable display under execution is output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during the variable display. It is suggested by the voice mode to be Details will be described below.

  As described above, during the high probability time reduction state, transition control to the probability variation middle mode is performed. Then, when being controlled to the in-probability mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to red and continuously outputs a predetermined special sound mode. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp that the high probability and short control state is controlled also by determining whether or not the special sound mode is output.

  And in this example, a variation pattern for executing "melody reach" (for example, "melody reach" is performed to become a big hit "melody reach positive variation big hit", "melody reach" is performed to become latent odd change big hit "melody Reach Latency Probability Big Hit, "Melody reach" is usually performed as a big hit "Melody reach normal hit", "Melody reach" is performed when a "Melody reach is lost" etc. Voice modes similar to the special voice mode (for example, the first half of the special voice mode that is intermittently output during the high probability time short state control). Or No. 1) or may be completely the same as the special voice mode), and when the variation display results in a jackpot "Melody reach" is controlled to transition to high probability time reduction state (probable variation mode) at a high rate after the end of the big hit gaming state compared to the case of performing the variable display based on the variation pattern other than "melody reach" and becoming a big hit "When it is a big hit by performing" ", the ratio controlled to high probability time short state (probable changing middle mode) after the end of big hit gaming state is controlled to another playing state (reproduction mode other than positive changing mode) Report that it is higher than the ratio.

  Specifically, the big hit determination process (step S81) is determined to be a big hit, and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) The big hit game state after the end of high probability time control to control the probability big hit (for example 15R (right) positive variation big hit, 10R (right) positive variation big hit, 15R (right) rank up positive variation big hit, 10R (left) positive variation big hit, 15R (left ) If it is decided to rank up probability variation big hit) will be a big hit (for example 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, 10R (left) usually big hit) to control to gaming state other than high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end "Melody reach" is executed in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) in comparison with the case Ratio the change pattern setting process to be higher for determining the dynamic pattern (first shift pattern setting process (step S82), the second change pattern setting process) constitutes a variation pattern table used in. As described above, the player can output the voice mode similar to the special voice mode that is output in the high probability time short state (probable mode) while the specific variation display is performed. Mode) is easily recalled, and the expectation to the high probability time short state (probable variation mode) is improved.

  In addition, the special voice mode is composed of "Intro", "A Melo" and "Sabi", and when the variation pattern for executing "Melody reach" is received, the variation display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. The above "intro" is output when starting the, and the right decorative symbol variably displayed at the timing of ending the "intro" is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol to generate reach. Then, when the reach effect of "melody reach" is started, the above "A melody" is output, and normally the decoration symbol in the variation display is displayed at a timing when the "A melody" ends and the display result is derived and displayed .

  On the other hand, when executing a reach development effect in which the ratio of becoming a big hit is even higher than the performed reach effect, that is, the “melody development reach” in which the ratio of becoming a big hit is higher than the variation pattern of performing “melody reach” When the variation pattern to be received is received, as shown in FIG. 213, “A Melo” is ended at the timing to end the reach effect, and “Sabi” is output when the reach development effect is started. Then, at the timing when the "sabi" is finished, the middle decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern for executing "melody development reach" is received, the inside decoration symbol is temporarily stopped (in a state of slowly changing up and down and not completely stopping) in synchronization with the end of "A melody". It is also possible to display the inside decoration pattern again at the timing of starting the output of the "Cabi".

  As described above, in the present example, the ratio of the big hit as the number of the configuration modes to be output in the variable display among the special sound modes including the plurality of configuration modes of "intro", "A melody" and "sabi" is large Is set to be high (the percentage of “melody development reach” becoming a big hit (“big hit expectation”) is higher than “melody reach”). More specifically, the melody development is more than the jackpot expectation rate of "melody reach" {(appearance rate of "melody reach") / (appearance rate of "melody reach out" + appearance rate of "melody reach")}. The above fluctuation so that the hit probability of “reach” {(appearance rate of “melody development reach”) / (appearance rate of “melody development reach off” + appearance rate of “melody development reach”) is higher The variation pattern table used in the pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) and the second variation pattern setting process) is configured. Therefore, as the configuration mode of the special display mode is switched, the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability time-short state can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the variable display in which "melody reach" is executed, transition control to a high probability time saving state is always performed after the big hit gaming state ends. Specifically, the big hit determination process (step S81) is determined to be a big hit, and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) Run the "melody reach" in the above variation pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) only when it is decided on the probability variation big jack to control to high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end If it is decided to be a variation pattern to be performed and it becomes a big hit to control to a gaming state other than the high probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state end, it is not decided to the fluctuation pattern for executing "melody reach". Therefore, when "melody reach" is executed, the expectation for the high probability time-short state can be improved, and attention can be paid to the currently displayed change display.

  It should be noted that, even when the big hit in the variable display performed "melody reach", it may be controlled to transition to a gaming state other than the high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state ends, in this case "melody reach" When the big hit in the variable display that has been performed is configured so that the rate of transition control to the high probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state is higher than when it is the big hit in the variable display that performed other reach May be Specifically, the big hit determination process (step S81) is determined to be a big hit, and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) Not only when it is decided to be a big variation to control to high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end, but also to be a big hit to control the gaming state other than high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end If it is determined to be a variation pattern that can be executed as well as a probability variation to control to a high probability time and a short condition after the end of the big hit gaming state, the "melody development reach" at a higher rate than the "melody reach" In the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process (step S82), second variation pattern setting process) to be selected It may constitute a variation pattern table use.

  Also, in this case, the larger the number of the configuration modes to be output in the variable display among the special sound modes including the plurality of configuration modes of "Intro", "A Melo" and "Sabi", the big hit When the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be configured such that the ratio of controlling to the high probability time reduction state is high. Specifically, when controlling to the high probability time and short state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the above variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting so as to select "melody development reach" at a higher rate than "melody reach" The variation pattern table used in the process (step S82) and the second variation pattern setting process may be configured. Thus, as the special display mode is switched, the expectation for the high probability short time state can be improved.

  Furthermore, in this example, although "melody reach" that outputs a voice mode similar to the special voice mode output in the high probability time short state is executed, the present invention is not limited thereto, but the low probability non-time short state (normal mode) A voice mode that is output in a low probability non-short time state (normal mode) when the "normal melody reach" is performed during the variable display and the same voice mode as the voice mode output at the time of the variable display During the variable display, the percentage is higher than when a big hit is performed by performing another reach that does not output during the variable display (including those to be controlled to the low probability untimely short state (normal mode)) Execute "time-saving melody reach" that outputs the same voice aspect as the voice aspect output in the low probability time-short state (time-span mode) while controlling in the non-time-short state (normal mode) The percentage that is higher than when a big hit is performed by performing another reach that is not output during the variable display when the voice aspect is output in the low probability time short state (time mode) when the big hit The thing to control to the low probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end with the thing which controls to (time / midday mode), the voice aspect which is similar to the voice aspect which is output in high probability non time short state (probability latent mode) Perform other reach not to output the voice aspect output in the high probability non-time short state (probable variation latent mode) when the "latency melody reach" to be output during the variable display becomes a big hit Make it possible to execute things such as control to high probability non-short state (probable latency mode) after the end of the big hit gaming state at a rate higher than when the big hit (invariably including objects controlled to high probability non-short state) It may be the one.

  In the high probability non-short state and the low probability non-short state, it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode of an aspect (so-called latency probability change) which is difficult to determine whether the control is controlled to the high probability non-short state or the low probability non-short state. There is a case. In this case, the percentage of voices that are output in the probability variation latent mode when performing a “latent melody reach” and become a big hit is higher than when performing another reach that does not output during variation display (a big hit ( Be sure to control the high probability non-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state in the high probability non-short state including the thing to be controlled), or when the "normal Melody reach" is performed and the big hit is output in the normal mode Voice mode is not output during the fluctuation display high probability non-time short after jackpot gaming state end at a higher rate (including those to be controlled to low probability non-time short state always) than when the other reach that does not output during variable display Control to the state (for example, when you become a latent probability variation big hit to control the high probability non-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state When the big hit to control the low probability non-short state after the big hit gaming state is usually a big hit Execute "Hinting Melody Reach" at a higher rate than when, or when it becomes a normal big hit to control the low probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state end When the big hit gaming state to control the high probability non-time short state The “normal melody reach” may be executed at a higher rate than when In this way, if the "latency melody reach" is a big hit, it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode that it is difficult to determine whether the high probability non-short state control or the low probability non-short state control is performed after the big hit gaming state ends. It is possible to recognize that there is a high probability non-short state or a high probability that the high probability non-short state is controlled, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be improved. In addition, when "latency melody reach" is executed, there is a high probability that the high probability non-short state or the high probability non-short state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends, so the player is more likely to generate a big hit. Desired, the game interest is improved.

  Also, in this case, the larger the number of the configuration modes to be output in the variable display among the special sound modes including the plurality of configuration modes of "Intro", "A Melo" and "Sabi", the big hit When the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be configured such that the ratio of controlling to the high probability non-short state becomes high. Specifically, the above variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern) so as to select "melody development reach" at a higher rate than "melody reach" when controlling to the high probability non-short state after the big hit gaming state ends The variation pattern table used in the setting process (step S82) and the second variation pattern setting process may be configured. This makes it possible to distinguish between the high probability non-short state and the low probability non-short state, and the special display mode switched during the big hit variation display even if it is controlled to the probability change latent mode difficult to determine It can be recognized that the possibility of being controlled to the high probability non-short state is high, and the expectation for the jackpot gaming state can be improved.

  Moreover, in this example, the switching time of the configuration mode and the switching time of the effect (the occurrence of reach, the end of the reach effect (if the reach development effect is not performed, the stop display of the inside decorative symbol), the end of the reach development effect (the inside decorative symbol Synchronization with the stop display)), it is possible for the player to easily recognize the switching of the effect, the occurrence of the reach, the derived display of the display result, etc., and each configuration of the special sound mode being output. Since the aspect and the effect content are made to correspond one to one, it is possible for the player to grasp the effect content from the configuration mode of the special sound mode being output without visually recognizing the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible (for example, when "A melody" is output, it is possible to grasp that reach production is performed).

  As described above, in this example, even if the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not visually recognized, it is suggested that the voice mode which naturally comes in from the ear is changed to control the definite change mode after the big hit gaming state ends Therefore, not only the player who is viewing the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also the player who is looking away from the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made to recognize that the “melody reach” variation display is being executed with certainty. For example, it is possible to prevent the problem of missing when the display contents such as displaying a character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 suggest some information. Furthermore, by making the player who is looking away from the liquid crystal display device 1900 recognize that “melody reach” is being performed, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is made to pay attention with anticipation for the big hit gaming state. Can.

  In the present embodiment, the special sound mode including the plurality of configuration modes is described. However, the special sound mode including one configuration mode may be used. In this case, the longer the output period of the special sound mode, the higher the proportion of the jackpot may be high, or the output of the special sound mode is ended / restarted in synchronization with the switching timing of the effect. May be

  Also, in the above-described example, the voice mode output during the variable display is configured to indicate the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, but a period for outputting the voice mode that suggests the gaming state after the big hit gaming state end The timing is not limited to those described above, and part of the variable display (for example, from the start of the variable display to the generation of the reach, during the reach production, during the reach development, any one of the reach development production (A plurality of combinations).

  In addition, as a result of this fluctuation indication, when it is a big hit, it is not limited to the one that suggests the gaming state after the big hit gaming state end, but as a result of the fluctuation indication executed after next time, a big hit game when it becomes a big hit It may be suggested that the game state to be transition controlled after the state end. Specifically, when it is determined in the effect predetermination process (steps S45 and S55) to be executed at the start winning occurrence that it is determined to be a probability change big hit to control to the high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end, The start winning combination determined to be a probability variation big hit in the effect pre-determination processing after performing "Melocity reach" and executing variation display that is off by one change indication before starting or over multiple change indications. In the variable display based on the above, the variable display that is a big hit may be executed in a mode other than “melody reach” or “melody reach”. In addition, even if it is determined to be a big hit other than a probability change big hit to control to high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end in the effect pre-determination processing (steps S45, S55), the start also at a predetermined ratio In the variable display before the start of the variable display based on the winning, "melody reach" may be executed to execute the variable display which is the departure. Also, in this case, the ratio of executing "melody reach" in the variable display based on the starting winning combination is lower than the ratio of executing "melody reach" in the variable displaying based on the starting winning combination determined to be a probability change big hit. By configuring, when performing a "melody reach", if a big hit occurs, the rate of performing transition control to the probability change mode after the big hit gaming state ends can be made higher than the rate of performing transition control to another effect mode .

  Moreover, although the above-mentioned example showed the thing which suggests the game state (rendering mode) after the end of the big hit game state by the voice mode outputted from the speakers 130, 222, 262 etc. during the variable display, a specific effect mode ( For example, a mode (for example, a specification similar to the mode executed by rendering means (for example, at least one of a means for executing effects such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp or an LED) other than the liquid crystal display device 1900) It may be part of the aspect to be executed during the effect mode (for example, the first half etc.) or may be completely the same as the aspect to be executed during the specific effect mode during the variable display As long as it is When the game state (rendering mode) after the big hit gaming state end is suggested by the light emission mode (for example, light emission color or blinking pattern; special light emission mode) of the lamp or LED, or the movable aspect of the movable body (for example, specific effect A variable display related to a specific effect mode is also executed when a movable body movable only during the mode; a special movable aspect) indicates the gaming state (rendering mode) after the end of the big hit gaming state Can be easily recognized by the player.

  In addition, as described above, in the present example, an effect that emphasizes that it is the probable change middle mode (high probability time reduction state) during the probability change middle mode (high probability time reduction state) (in this example, the special voice mode is intermittent (repeated) Output) is executed. By this, the effect to be executed during the definite variation mode (high probability time reduction condition) is imprinted on the player's mind, and this variation and the definite variation mode (high probability time reduction condition) are strongly associated and stored. When an effect to be executed during (high probability time reduction state) is executed, it is possible to immediately recall the probability variation middle mode (high probability time reduction state). Moreover, although the thing which outputs a special sound mode intermittently (repeatedly) is shown in this example as an effect emphasizing that it is a definite variation mode (high probability time short status), it is not limited to this, but a definite variation mode (high probability For example, the light emission mode (for example, light emission color or blinking pattern) of the lamp or LED, the movable mode of the movable body (for example, high probability time short state) Movable body), an audio aspect (special audio aspect) of a speaker, or the like, or any combination thereof (which may all be performed) may be executed.

  Also, when suggesting by the flat display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is difficult for the player to notice that the indication content is suggested if he / she does not pay attention to the display contents, but as in this example, The liquid crystal display according to the operation mode of the movable body, which makes it easy to notice the movement if it is in the field of view by physically operating the coming sound mode or the three-dimensional shaped object, and the light emission mode of the lamp or LED coming into the eye naturally. Even if the content displayed on the device 1900 is not watched, it is controlled to give a sense of discomfort to the player and controlled in a mode different from normal, and in a manner similar to the mode executed during a specific rendering mode. You can easily make them notice.

  That is, the other gaming machine is controlled to transition to the high probability state for the first time to the player who is playing a game in the gaming machine for the first time and the player who does not know the contents of the effect of the gaming machine A voice mode different from the voice mode is output, and a voice mode output in an advantageous state can be notified by listening to a voice mode output from a gaming machine that has acquired a large number of winning balls. And if the same voice aspect as the voice aspect output in the above-mentioned advantageous state is output from the gaming machine in which the player is playing, will my gaming machine also be in an advantageous state? I can have the expectation that In addition, since the player does not always keep looking at the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be overlooked by paying attention to whether the game ball is won in the starting openings 2101 and 2102. Even by making the voice mode the same voice mode as the voice mode to be executed during the specific effect mode, it can be made to notice that a chance has come to the gaming machine in which the player is playing, again The display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be focused on.

  Further, the same effect is obtained when the light emission mode of the lamp / LED is set to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode executed during the specific effect mode. That is, the light emission of the gaming machine in which the lamp and the LED are controlled to emit light in a manner different from that of the other gaming machines by transition control to the high probability state and being controlled to the definite variation mode If you know the light emission mode of the lamp or LED that is executed in an advantageous state by looking at the mode, you want to be in that state as the player's mind. In this state, it is expected that a chance has come to the game machine being played when the game machine being played is suddenly controlled to emit light in the same manner as the light emission mode executed during the specific effect mode. Do. For example, during the effect mode other than the specific effect mode, the lamp / LED mainly provided on the game board 4 is controlled to emit light, and during the specific effect mode, the lamp / LED provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 Control the light emission over a wide range of the provided lamp and LED, increase the brightness of the lamp and LED in a specific effect mode more than in a effect mode other than a specific effect mode, or in a specific effect mode Flash the lamp or LED at a shorter interval than in a rendering mode other than a specific rendering mode, or during a specific rendering mode, emit more luminous color than in a rendering mode other than a specific rendering mode (for example, a specific rendering mode Is it also noticed to the player who was not looking at the liquid crystal display device 1900 by setting the light emission color of the red system to the light emission color of the blue and green systems in the other effect modes, etc.) It is Rukoto can be again attracted attention to the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it can appeal that has been controlled to a specific production mode to turn a third party.

  Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained when the movable aspect of the movable body is the same as the movable aspect performed during the specific effect mode. That is, the movable aspect of the gaming machine in which the movable body is movably controlled in a manner different from that of the other gaming machines by transition control to the high probability state and being controlled to the definite variation mode, and acquiring a large number of winning balls. Have a desire to be in the same state if they know the movable aspect of the movable body to be executed in an advantageous state by watching the, and suddenly their own gaming machine is executed during a specific effect mode When the movable body is movably controlled in the movable mode similar to the movable mode, it is expected that a chance has come to the gaming machine in which the player is playing. For example, a movable body provided in the game area 1100 and not moving in a rendering mode other than a specific rendering mode is operated at a predetermined interval, or a movable body not moving in a rendering mode other than the specific rendering mode is liquid crystal displayed The liquid crystal display device 1900 is viewed by causing the movable body to appear forward so as to overlap with the device 1900, or by operating the movable body at a shorter interval during a specific effect mode than during an effect mode other than the specific effect mode. The player who was not able to notice that something is happening can be made to pay attention to the display contents of the liquid crystal display 1900 again, and the third party is also controlled to a specific effect mode. I can appeal to you.

  Further, unlike the display content of the flat liquid crystal display device 1900, since it is suggested by the sound mode, the operation mode of the movable body, and the light emission mode, the control mode of these rendering means in other game machines can be easily viewed The control mode of the rendering means can be grasped by visually recognizing the control states of other gaming machines in the specific rendering mode, and the rendering means is suddenly in the specific rendering mode in a state other than the specific rendering mode. When it is controlled in the same manner as the control mode, it can be expected that it will be controlled to a specific effect mode, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In this way, when a big hit is achieved by controlling the rendering means, which makes it easy for a third party to easily recognize the driving state, in the same manner as the mode executed during the specific rendering mode In order to suggest that the rate of transition is high (or transition to a specific effect mode), by performing the effect, the player can be given a sense of superiority by receiving an eye for envy.

  In addition, it is desirable that such an effect is to be executed even in the player's own game machine by visually recognizing that the effect means is controlled in the same mode as the mode executed in the specific effect mode in other game machines. While strongly giving a desire, I can also give a desire to be immersed in a sense of superiority.

  In addition, the above effect is further improved by suggesting that it is controlled to a higher advantage state (a high expectation value for winning balls) of a plurality of types of game states after the end of the big hit game state It is also possible to For example, when the control is changed to the probability change mode (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state having a greater number of prize balls obtainable in the jackpot gaming state Control to a large jackpot gaming state (for example, the sum of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot gaming state, such as 5R jackpot gaming state and 15R jackpot gaming state when controlling to 15R jackpot gaming state) When doing a big hit, perform the same mode as in the definite change mode during the variable display (when the big hit with a large number of obtainable balls is higher than the big hit with a small number of available balls in the big hit gaming state) It may be executed in proportion), the number cut off after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when the variable display of the number of times determined in advance is executed to end the control of the high probability state Of the so-called "ST machine" in the case of controlling in the mode (high probability time short state) a big hit (for example, 50 times in the probability mode) in which more variable display can be performed in the positive time mode (high probability time short state) When it becomes possible to execute one of the 100 variable displays, the same mode as the positive variation mode is executed during the variable display when it becomes the large hit that can be executed 100 times (in the positive variation mode) The game interest can be further improved by performing the big hit with a large number of variable displays that can be performed rather than the big hit that can be performed with a small number of possible variable displays.

  Specifically, if it is determined to be 15R (right) probability variation big hit in the corresponding processing of step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing and the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing, the first variation pattern setting processing and The second variation pattern setting process is configured to select the 15R (right) positive variation big hit variation pattern table and determine the variation pattern, and determine “melody reach” in the 15R (right) positive variation big hit variation pattern table The rate is selected if it is determined to be another probability change jackpot controlled to a jackpot gaming state in which the number of award balls obtainable is smaller than the jackpot gaming state executed when the 15R (right) probability variation jackpot is reached Set higher than the fluctuation pattern table (determine the fluctuation pattern table to be selected if it is determined to be another probability change big hit) as "melody reach" May also be) as configured not be. In the big hit gaming state executed when 15R (right) probability variation big hit is reached, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls than the big hit gaming state executed when another big hit becomes By performing the "reach", it is possible to improve the game interest.

  Similarly, in the definite variation during the definite variation mode (high probability time short condition) in the corresponding processing of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing and the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing, the probability variation big hit that can be executed 100 times If determined, the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process are configured to select the variation pattern by selecting the variation pattern table in the ST100 times jackpot, and the variation pattern table is determined in the ST100 number variation pattern table. The percentage to be determined as “melody reach” is higher than the variation pattern table selected when it is determined to be a probability variation big hit that can execute variation display less than 100 times in the probability variation mode (high probability time short status) Set (determine the probability variation big hit that can be executed less than 100 times of variation display in the probability variation mode (high probability time short status) It may also be) as configured not determined variation pattern table is selected in the "melody reach" when it is. In the probability variation big hit that can perform 100 times of variation display in the probability variation mode (high probability time short status) occurrence of the big hit gaming state again than the probability variation big hit (for example 50 times) that can execute the variation display less than 100 times Because the player is more likely to play a game and is in a more advantageous state, the game interest can be improved by executing "melody reach".

  Note that transition control from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, 50 times) by controlling in the definite variation mode (high probability time short state) of number cut At this time, control of the time saving state may be ended simultaneously and transition control may be made to the low probability non-time saving state, or until a predetermined number of variable display is executed without ending control of the time saving state (for example, big hit gaming state end) After that, it may be controlled to shift to the low probability time short state continuously until the variable display is executed 100 times) or until the big hit gaming state is reached again. In this case, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times is performed as the certain change mode of the number cut, control of the short time state is simultaneously ended and transition control to the low probability non-short state is performed in advance. If it is configured to control to either the 2nd ST jackpot to shift control to the low probability time / short state without ending the control of the short time state when the variable display of the number of times is executed, the first special If it is decided in the second ST big hit in the processing corresponding to step S123 of the symbol stop symbol setting processing and the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing, the second fluctuation in the second fluctuation pattern setting processing in the first fluctuation pattern setting processing and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing The pattern table is selected to be configured to determine the variation pattern, and “melody reach” is determined in the second ST jackpot variation pattern table. The ratio is set higher than the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined (the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined) May be configured not to be determined as "melody reach". Even if control is shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state at the end of the second ST big hit, control of the short time state continues without ending, so the starting opening per unit time As the number of winning prizes in 2101 and 2102 increases, the chances of a big hit lottery increase, and since the player is in an advantageous state, the “melody reach” can be executed to improve the game interest.

  In the example described above, drive control of the rendering means (for example, at least one of a speaker, a movable body, and a means for executing effects such as a lamp and an LED) in the same manner as in the specific effect mode during the variable display. , And when it is a big hit in the variable display, it is controlled to a specific effect mode after the end of the big hit gaming state, and at least one of the means (for example, a speaker, a movable body, a lamp, LED, etc. executes effects) To start the drive control in a mode during the specific effect mode of), but performing "melody reach" to be a big hit when it is a big hit and running a big hit gaming state It is before the big hit symbol is derived and displayed while executing the effect which is hard to be understood by the player and the situation similar to the aspect in the specific effect mode continuously from before the transition control to the specific mode In the representation section may be controlled drive. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the variation pattern of Melodyreach 2R probability variation big hit that performs transition control to high probability time reduction state after executing “melody reach” and controlling to 2R big hit gaming state open for a short time (about 0.5 seconds) Then, the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is started and the output of the sound mode similar to the special sound mode is started from the speakers 130, 222, 262 etc. (FIG. 214 (A)). At a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbol on the right (in the example shown in FIG. 214 (B), the timing at which the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol and reach the middle decorative symbol is not displayed yet) The liquid crystal display device 1900 is suddenly blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off to cause the display to disappear) (FIG. 214 C).

  Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), white out gradually from near the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is extinguished to display white) (Figs. 214 (D) and (E)) and the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays white as "full The player is notified of transition control to (FIG. 214 (F)), and control of the probability variation middle mode (high probability time reduction state) is started (FIG. 214 (G)).

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 215, the big winning opening is opened twice for a short time during the period until the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out and then gradually whitened out and displayed as "certain change mode entry!" Run 2R big hit gaming state. That is, a predetermined effect (in this example, an effect of gradually making a white out after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 in this example) is executed without displaying and displaying the display result of the decorative symbol and without notifying that a big hit has been made. By making the 2R big hit gaming state during the effect, it is difficult for the player to realize that the 2R big hit gaming state is reached. Then, the player is given unexpectedness by being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as “probable inside change mode rush!” Without the display result of the decorative symbol being derived and displayed.

  In addition, it may be a voice mode similar to the special voice mode (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half, the first number, etc.) before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The output of the special voice aspect is continued until the control of the indeterminate mode is ended (repeatedly executed). Therefore, the special voice mode is output during the variable display, so that the player can be reminded of the indeterminate mode and can be recognized as being controlled to the indeterminate mode at any time, giving unexpectedness and improving the amusement effect be able to.

  In the above example, as shown in FIG. 215, the output of the special voice mode is started when the variable display based on the variation pattern of Melodyreach 2R probability variation big hit is started, but the variation display, that is, the special symbol The output of the special sound mode may be started within a period from the start of the variable display of to the derivation display of the display result of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, it may be executed in combination with the above-described "melody reach" in which the special sound aspect is outputted during the variable display to stop and display the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the transition to the probability change mode is suddenly controlled or the big hit gaming state occurs, and the variation of the effect increases, and the player is not bored.

  In the above example, the high probability non-short state is always controlled to the probability variation latent mode, but the high probability non-time short state is configured to control either the probability variation latent mode or the positive number non-short time mode. When controlling to the probability variation latent mode in the high probability non-short state, the presentation means (for example, the speaker, the movable body, the lamp, the LED, etc. are continuously displayed in the same manner as the probability variation non-time short mode At least one of the means to be executed may be drive-controlled to shift control (promotion) from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-time-short mode.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the "promotion melody reach" in the probability variation latent mode in the high probability non-short state and when it receives the variation pattern of the promotion melody reach that is out, the decoration of the left, middle, right Start the variation display of the symbol and start the output of the same voice aspect as the specific voice aspect output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 etc. in the probability variation non-short mode, and the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols The liquid crystal display device 1900 is suddenly blacked out (a backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off to make the display disappear) at a predetermined timing.

  Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), white out gradually from near the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is extinguished to display white) To make a transition to a probability variable non-short mode (high probability non-short state) by displaying “probable non-time short mode rush!” Based on the liquid crystal display device 1900 being completely white out. In addition to notifying the player, control of the positive / negative short time mode is started.

  As described above, in the case of controlling to the high probability non-short state and controlling to the probability variation latent mode as the effect mode, the voice mode similar to the specific voice mode (for example, one of the specific voice modes) Start the output of a part (for example, the first half or No. 1) or may be completely the same as the specific voice aspect, and thereafter, until the control of the definite variation non-time-short mode ends Continue output (repeat). Therefore, it is possible to remind the player of the probability variation non-short time mode by the specific voice mode being output during the variable display and to recognize that it is controlled to the probability variation non-time short mode at any time, giving surprise and giving the game interest. It can be improved.

  In the example described above, although the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out after being displayed in the variation display in which the specific voice mode is output, and the transition control to the probability variation non-time-short mode is indicated without displaying the out-of-design symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and normal change display may be performed without blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display an out-of-place symbol, and to notify transition control to the probability variation non-time-short mode. As a result, even if the display result is lost, it is possible to improve the game interest by promoting the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-short time mode to a state advantageous to the player. In this case, a predetermined combination (for example, a combination of symbols including all of “1”, “3” and “5”, etc.) may be displayed.

  In addition, even when transition control (promotion) is not performed from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-short mode, the specific voice mode may be output during the variable display at a predetermined ratio (so-called "gasse"). In this case, the output period of the specific voice mode during the variable display may be shorter in the case of continuing the definite variation latent mode than when transition control (promotion) to the definite variation non-short time mode. For example, in the case of transition control to the probability variation non-short mode, the output of the specific voice aspect is started at a predetermined timing (which may be simultaneous with the start of the variation display) after the variation display starts. While the specific voice aspect is continuously output until the time saving mode is ended, the predetermined timing after the variable display is started when the definite variation latent mode is continued without performing transition control to the positive variation non-short mode At the same time as the start of the variable display, the output of the specific voice aspect is started and the output of the specific voice aspect is stopped before the stop display of the design is stopped and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not blacked out. The symbol may be stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the transition control (promotion) to the definite variation non-shortening mode is not performed, the expectation for the definite variation non-shorting mode can be improved.

[8. Arm and character production]
Next, arm-effects production performed during the variable display will be described. In this example, when the arm unit 3250 is exposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (that is, in front of the display area where a predetermined effect image is displayed) during variable display, reach effect (reach development) It is supposed to shift to production). Details will be described below.

  As described above, the back up back movable effect unit 3200 is disposed directly behind the back up front movable effect unit 3400, and the upper arm of the back up front decoration 3406 of the back up front movable effect unit 3400 and the back arm of the back up back movable effect unit 3200 Since the unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration 3352) are formed to have substantially the same size, the back-up front movable rendering unit 3400 and the back-up back movable presentation unit 3200 are ordinary. In the state where the back decoration 3406 and the upper arm decoration 3304 are in the retracted position and the forearm decoration 3352 is in the storage position, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are on the back side of the back decoration 3406. It is almost hidden (see FIG. 174). Although the front part of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 has a flashy pattern that can be appealed to the player's vision, the upper arm decorative body 3304 on the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 And when the forearm decoration 3352 is almost hidden, the pattern attached to the front of the arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 may be hidden by the forearm decoration 3352 and viewed in front view Not possible (see Figure 217). Hereinafter, the upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 will be collectively referred to as "movable means".

  In the variation pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) executed by the main control MPU 4100a, the arm character product reach variation pattern that causes the arm unit 3250 to appear in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is selected The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the variable display based on the reception of the change pattern command instructing the change pattern (see FIG. 216). Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the reach of the decorative symbol (in this case, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is still After displaying the state in which the stop display is not performed), the character in the mode of swinging the arm down is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without executing the reach effect, and at the same time, the back is first shown in FIG. With the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 hidden behind the upper front decoration 3406, the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is passed as a front step of the specific movable effect to be described later, as shown in FIG. From the storage position (initial position) in the counterclockwise direction by approximately 90 degrees (see FIGS. 174C and 218). Hereinafter, the state in which the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 is referred to as "superimposed state", and the upper front decorative body 3406 in this superimposed state, upper arm decorative body The 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 will be referred to as "moving means in a superimposed state".

  Here, as described above, when the movable means is in the standby position (see FIG. 174 (c) and FIG. 218), these (upper front decoration 3406, upper arm decoration 3304 and forearm decoration 3352) can be viewed from the front It has become invisible. When the movable means in the superimposed state passes the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is superimposed in the superimposed state in synchronization with the advancement of the movable means in the superimposed state to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. A predetermined display effect (in this example, a display effect such as emitting light from the upper front decoration 3406) which the player can gaze at is displayed rather than the passage in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 of a certain movable means. As a result, the gaze of the player can be brought to a predetermined display effect rather than passing of the movable means in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the superimposed state. That is, when passing the movable means in the superimposed state in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in synchronization with this, the player pays attention more than the movable means in the superimposed state passes in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. By displaying on the liquid crystal display device 1900 a predetermined display effect that can be made, the passage of the movable means in the overlapping state in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed in a mode in which be able to. Moreover, since the passage of the movable means in the superimposed state in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed in a mode (a mode such as a specific movable effect described later) expected to be a big hit, the movable means in the superimposed state is It can be limited to the extent that the player can know that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has passed in front. In this embodiment, the upper arm unit 3300 is in a state in which the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back surface front decorative body 3406 (that is, the plurality of members are compactly folded). And the movable means in a form in which the light emission effect of the plurality of LEDs provided in the forearm unit 3350 is not exhibited (the state in which the LED is turned off and / or the plurality of LEDs is hidden in the back front decoration 3406) Are not advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and passed in a form crossing the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as not to be expected to be a big hit. Furthermore, the volume and the like of the sound effect are suppressed more than when a specific movable effect described later is performed so as not to expect a big hit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the entire backarm front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 from the storage position to the standby position based on the received variation pattern, and then the entire forearm decoration 3352 is A specific movable effect is performed to make the appearance position (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219) visible from the player side. When this specific movable effect is performed, it is highly possible that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", and therefore, the player can be highly expected. However, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not always always perform the specific movable effect after moving the movable means in the overlapping state from the storage position to the standby position. That is, the specific movable effect is performed only when the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing the specific movable effect. Therefore, even if the movable means in the superimposed state moves from the storage position to the standby position, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed without performing the specific movable effect, and the current variable display is ended. Sometimes.

  When the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific movable effect capable of giving the player a sense of expectation that is a big hit, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the movable means in the overlapping state from the storage position to the standby position. Or the appearance position where the entire forearm decorative body 3352 can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219), or held in the standby position for a predetermined period of time. At a predetermined timing in relation to the display, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is brought into a state of appearance where it can be seen by the player.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a is a fluctuation pattern in which the received fluctuation pattern is to execute a specific movable effect, and immediately after being moved to the standby position, brings the entire forearm decorative body 3352 into the appearance position seen from the player side In this case, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decoration are immediately moved after moving the movable means in the overlapping state through the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and temporarily moving to the standby position (see FIG. 174 (c) and FIG. 218). Only the body 3352 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (while the back top front decoration 3406 is kept in the standby position), and the proximal end of the upper arm decoration 3304 moves away from the back top front decoration 3406 in the left direction. From the state where the forearm decoration 3352 overlaps with the upper arm decoration 3304, the tip side is rotated so as to be away from the upper arm decoration 3304, and the back upper front decoration 34 The upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the rear side of the six (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the arm unit 3250 is further moved leftward in front view. The entire 3352 is in the appearance position where it can be seen by the player (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219). Also, when advancing the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the specific movable effect by the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219) To make the liquid crystal display device 1900 pay attention to the forearm decoration 3352 (in this example, a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front of the forearm decoration 3352 are turned on, and A display effect based on the forearm decorative body 3352 as a main component and emitting light toward the periphery of the forearm decorative body 3352 is performed (see FIG. 219). Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise as viewed from the front, and rotates the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise as viewed from the front, thereby the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative The body 3352 and back upper front decoration 3406 are returned to the state of the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development production, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position to be visible and improve the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state Can.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a fluctuation pattern in which the received fluctuation pattern is to execute a specific movable effect, and in the case where the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is not immediately brought into a state of appearance where it can be seen from the player side With the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the front decorative body 3406, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved forward to the standby position (see FIGS. 174 (c) and 218). After that, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are held in the standby position and the normal reach effect is performed. Then, the proximal end side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction and the fore arm decorative body 3352 overlaps the upper arm decorative body 3304 so that the distal end side moves away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 The upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the arm unit 3250 is further leftward in front view By moving the forearm to the player, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is brought into the state of the appearance position seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219). At this time, among the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352, only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 advance from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display 1900, and the back upper front decoration The body 3406 will remain in the standby position. Also, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to focus on the forearm decoration 3352 in synchronization with the advancement of the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 forward to the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in this example, light is emitted from the forearm decoration 3352) Display). Thereafter, when the specific movable effect is finished, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise as viewed from the front, and rotates the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise as viewed from the front. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are returned to the state of the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development production, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position to be visible and improve the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state Can.

  When the specific movable effect is executed, as described above, although the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 advance from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the back upper front decorative body 3406 remains at the standby position. . Therefore, at this time, since the patterns attached to the front portions of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be viewed in a front view, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the standby position. Visual impression (visual image) seen from the front and visual image seen from the front of the movable means in the superimposed state where the movable means in the superimposed state is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the initial position It will be.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the storage position after performing the specific movable effect, the base end side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 is right While bringing it close to the back top front decoration 3406 in the direction, the back top front decoration 3406 is turned clockwise in a front view. And while turning the tip side of the forearm decoration 3352 so that the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 overlap, the back upper front decoration 3406 hides the overlapping upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 from the front Thus, the back upper front decoration 3406 is turned clockwise in a front view. Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in the state of performing specific movable rendering (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219), and the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the standby position. Return to the storage position along with. However, at this time, it is necessary for the player's gaze not to move from the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the upper arm decorative body 3304, back upper front decorative body 3406 and forearm decorative body 3352 returned to the storage position. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are returned to the storage position, the player's gaze on the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not hindered Move them to the storage position. Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are placed on the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 in which the upper arm decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are performed. Of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the state of being hidden, and forward movement of the liquid crystal display device from the standby position of only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in order to perform the specific movable effect. , Is returned to the storage position in a manner that is quiet (hidden). In particular, the back upper front decoration 3406, which is returned from the standby position to the storage position, needs to be quietly returned to the storage position. In the present embodiment, for example, the back front decoration 3406 is returned from the standby position to the storage position at the timing when the display effect is switched from the normal reach effect to the reach development effect. Since whether the reach effect develops from the normal reach effect to the reach effect is whether or not the player pays attention in playing the game, the effect of attracting attention of such a player is performed to pay attention to the player When the rear upper front decoration 3406 in the standby position can be returned to the storage position in a very natural form without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, as a method to return the rear upper front decoration 3406 left in the standby position with the specific movable effect to the storage position in a very natural form without discomfort, the display effect from the normal reach effect to the reach development effect is It is not limited to returning from the standby position to the storage position at the switching timing. For example, if the player's gaze can be moved from the stand-by position to the storage position from the back front decoration 3406 to another location, it can be moved from the standby position to the storage position in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to notice. it can. For example, when developing from normal reach production to reach development production, if the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit differs depending on the development destination, the display production that suggests the development of the reach development production at the development destination is By displaying the back upper front decoration 3406 in the display area away from the path when the upper front decoration 3406 moves from the standby position to the storage position, the back upper front decoration 3406 can be made in a manner not easily noticed by the player. It can be moved to the storage position.

  Also, with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, the front position of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is passed and the standby position (see FIGS. 174 (c) and 218). Upper arm decoration 3304, back upper front decoration 3406, and forearm decoration that is moved to the standby position from the storage position when the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the specific movable effect despite movement to While the body 3352 is held at the standby position (without the specific movable effect being performed), the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406, and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the state of the storage position without performing the specific movable effect, to the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 A state in which the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, which is performed as a step before specific movable rendering, in the overlapping state where the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden. Both in the forward direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and in the forward direction of the liquid crystal display device from the standby position of only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in order to perform the specific movable effect. And the storage position is returned to the storage position. In this embodiment, for example, a time for darkening the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided before the finalized display for deciding the lottery result is performed in the current variable display, and the movable in the superimposed state is performed in this darkened time The means is passed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and returned from the standby position to the storage position. Then, in accordance with the fact that the movable means in the superimposed state has passed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a confirmation display for confirming the lottery result in the current variable display is performed. Thereby, it is possible to return the arm decoration body 3304, back front decoration 3406 and forearm decoration 3352 which are compactized in the superimposed state from the standby position to the storage position in a very natural form without a sense of discomfort It becomes. It is preferable that the time for darkening the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 be as short as possible within the range in which the movable means in the overlapping state can be returned from the standby position to the storage position.

  In addition, liquid crystal display is used as a method of returning the arm decoration body 3304, back front decoration 3406, and forearm decoration 3352 which are compacted in the superimposed state from the standby position to the storage position in a very natural form without discomfort It is not limited to darkening the display of the device 1900. For example, if it is possible to move the gaze of the player from the standby position to the storage position from the arm decoration 3304, back front decoration 3406 and forearm decoration 3352 to another location, the player is less likely to notice It can be moved from the standby position to the storage position. For example, a display effect which attracts a player who can predict the result of the next variable display is a path when the arm decoration 3304, the back upper front decoration 3406 and the forearm decoration 3352 move from the standby position to the storage position. Moving the arm decoration 3304, back upper front decoration 3406 and forearm decoration 3352 from the standby position to the storage position in such a manner that the player is less likely to notice the display area it can.

  In the standby position, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 are exposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can be viewed from the player, and the peripheral control MPU 4140 a The upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are slightly pivoted to the left and right while controlling the plurality of LEDs mounted on the 3305 in a predetermined light emission mode (flashing in this example), and the upper arm decorative body 3304 and A flame is displayed in the vicinity of the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on which a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 is superimposed, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are highlighted (feature turning effect). As described above, the expectation for the appearance of the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 of the player at the standby position is further improved.

  That is, peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back surface front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 to the standby position and then holds the standby position for the predetermined period. In the above, a preparation effect can be provided which can give a sense of expectation that the specific movable effect is performed.

  When the specific movable effect is performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise when the normal reach effect is finished in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The proximal end of the upper arm decorative body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction and the forearm decorative body 3352 rotates so that the distal end side moves away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 The upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the arm unit 3250 is further leftward in front view As a result, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is brought into a state of appearance where it can be seen by the player (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219). ). In addition, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to focus on the forearm decoration 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the liquid crystal display 1900 of the forearm decoration 3352 (in this example, a display such as emitting light from the forearm decoration 3352) Run.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise as viewed from the front, and rotates the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise as viewed from the front to display the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 And, the back upper front decoration body 340 is returned to the state of the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect that has been executed, so the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position and becomes visible so that the expectation for the player's jackpot game state is expected. Can be improved.

  In addition, after the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the reach of the decorative pattern based on the received fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 4140a waits for the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 immediately without performing reach production. A normal reach effect (the reach effect of the same effect mode may be sufficient, and it may be a reach effect of a different effect mode, without moving to a position (FIG. 174 (c)). One which performs a plurality of reach effects in a single change display of one special symbol and a second special symbol) (the one which develops the reach effect a plurality of times or the one which executes the reach effect a plurality of times by executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation ), Or may be to execute reach effect over a plurality of variable displays.) After performing a predetermined number of times (or one or more times) Upper front decorative body 3406, there is a case of moving the upper arm decorative body 3304, and a forearm ornamental body 3352 to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)).

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs back processing based on the received variation pattern even when the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 are moved to the standby position after the normal reach effect is performed a predetermined number of times. After the upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are moved to the standby position, the entire forearm decoration 3352 is immediately moved to the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (FIG. 175 (e)) And see FIG. 219) or held in the standby position for a predetermined period, and in the state of the appearance position where the entire forearm decorative body 3352 can be seen from the player side at a predetermined timing in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Do.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the front upper back decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 to the standby position immediately after executing the normal reach effect a predetermined number of times, and then immediately performs the forearm decoration The liquid crystal display device 1900 is synchronized with the forward movement of the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the forearm decorative body 3352 while setting the appearance position where the entire 3352 can be seen from the player side (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219). A display for making the forearm decorative body 3352 pay attention (in this example, a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decorative body 3352) is performed. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 to the state of the accommodation position, and starts the reach development effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development production, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position to be visible and improve the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state Can.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back-up front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 to the standby position immediately after executing the normal reach effect a predetermined number of times, and immediately after the entire forearm decoration 3352 When the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 are temporarily moved to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)) when not in the appearance position as seen from the player side, the upper arm decoration The 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are held at the standby position for a predetermined period, and the normal reach production (the reach production with a higher hit probability than the reach production performed previously) is performed again on the liquid crystal display device 1900 You may do it, you may be made to execute reach production of the big hit expectation which is equal to the reach production which was executed last time) That. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the above-described character turning effect to further improve the expectation for the appearance of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves to the state of the appearance position where the entire forearm decorative body 3352 can be seen from the player side at the timing when the normal reach effect is finished in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. (Refer to 219) and a display for letting the liquid crystal display device 1900 pay attention to the forearm decoration 3352 in synchronization with the movement of the forearm decoration 3352 to the front of the liquid crystal display 1900 (in this example, light is emitted from the forearm decoration 3352) (Like display).

  Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decoration 3406 and the back upper front decoration 3406 which are hardly visible (difficult to see) from the player side. A game in which the upper arm decorative body 3304 is thought to be exposed in order to move to a standby position where the player can hardly see again (visual difficulty) despite appearing once visible to the player in the state. Disappoint and discourage people. After that, by making the upper arm decorative body 3304 exposed, it is possible to surprise the player and to further delight the player, thereby improving the fun of the game.

  Further, in a state where the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, they are temporarily moved from the storage position to the standby position through the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (d), the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406, and further in FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. As shown, by moving the arm unit 3250 in the left direction in the front view (the direction toward the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900), the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is brought into a state of appearing position seen from the player side By performing the movable effect of the, it is possible to increase the jackpot expectation.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 175 (e), the arm unit 3250 is moved from the standby position to the left as viewed from the front. Although the upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are once positioned in front of the liquid crystal display 1900, here the standby position is passed through the front of the liquid crystal display without performing specific movable effect. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by performing an effect such as moving to. That is, in the conventional gaming machine which tends to be focused only on whether or not the movable body advances in front of the liquid crystal display device, if the movable body advances in front of the liquid crystal display device, the jackpot expected degree However, unless the movable body advances into the front of the liquid crystal display device, a big hit can not be expected. On the other hand, in such a conventional game machine, if the frequency at which the movable body advances to the front of the liquid crystal display device is increased, the movable body effect itself becomes an effect that the expectation of the big hit is low, The presentation itself will become mundane. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 in the storage position are once positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a stage before specific movable effect. Here, by performing the effect of passing the front of the liquid crystal display device and moving it to the standby position without performing the specific movable effect, the expectation for the specific movable effect and thus the big hit can be raised. Moreover, even if the frequency of performance in the previous stage of such specific movable effects is increased, if the execution frequency of the specific movable effects is not increased, the big hit expectation for this specific movable effect can be maintained, and a drop in interest It becomes possible to suppress.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the advancement of the arm unit 3250 to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes the advancement of the first stage, the advancement of the second stage, and the advancement of the third stage. Advancement of the first stage is performed as a pre-stage of the specific movable effect, from the initial position in a state in which the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are hidden behind the back top front decoration 3406 Advance of the In the second step, the back upper front decoration 3406 is left at the standby position to perform the specific movable effect, and the liquid crystal display 1900 is moved forward from the standby position for only the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352. It is an advance. Advancement of the third step is liquid crystal from the standby position for the back top front decoration 3406 left at the standby position after the specific movable effect is finished as the advance of the third step when the specific movable effect is performed The upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are on the back side of the back upper front decoration 3406 as the front movement of the display device 1900 and the third stage movement when the specific movable effect is not performed. This is a forward movement of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the standby position in the hidden state. Of the first stage, second stage and third stage, it is the second stage to advance to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the most noticeable form (to attract the player's attention). The third stage is to advance to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the least conspicuous manner. If the strength of the degree to which the arm unit 3250 can bring the player's attention is relatively strong, the form becomes more prominent.

  In this embodiment, although the first stage advancement and the second stage advancement are both the same in that the arm unit 3350 is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display in the first stage advancement The role of the display effect displayed on the device 1900 differs from the role of the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the second stage of advancement. That is, in FIG. 216, three houses are displayed far on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and are scrolled in the horizontal direction. Then, in FIG. 217 showing advancement of the first stage, although the arm unit 3250 is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is variable according to the movement of the arm unit 3250 (movable body Switching effect control means).

  Specifically, when the arm unit 3250 passes in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the first stage of advancement, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the three houses far away, but the distance to the house is Is closer and only one house is displayed. In FIG. 217, one house whose distance is short is displayed in the display area (the display area on the left side of the arm unit 3250 in FIG. 217) through which the arm unit 3250 has already passed. In the display area which has not passed (display area on the right side of the arm unit 3250 in FIG. 217), the house is still displayed far. Thus, by switching the display effect in accordance with the movement of the arm unit 3250, the player's gaze can be attracted to the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 rather than the movable effect (movement) by the arm unit 3250. That is, in the first stage, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the main effect, and the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 is the effect to follow.

  In the second stage, based on the result of the special lottery, the arm unit 3250 is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the standby position, and a backup effect is provided to boost the specific movable effect as the display effect Effect control means). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 219, a forearm decoration 3352 that emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front of the forearm decoration 3352 toward the periphery of the forearm decoration 3352. The display effect that enlivens this is performed. At this time, the player's gaze can be attracted to the movable effect (specific movable effect) by the arm unit 3250, rather than the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, in the second stage of advancement, the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 is the main effect, and the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the subordinate effect.

  As described above, in the first stage advancing, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mainly produced and the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 is followed, but in the second stage advancing, the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 The main effect is to make the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 a secondary effect, thereby backing up the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to each other according to the state of the game Can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's gaze from being biased unilaterally to any one of the two effects of different tastes, and it is possible to mutually draw out the goodness of each of the effects, and it is possible to It becomes possible to perform an effect effectively. In addition, by switching the master-slave relationship between the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the state of the game, the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage, Even if the arm unit 3250 passes in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a series of movements due to the movement of the arm unit 3250 between the standby position and the storage position passing the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be It becomes possible to do in a very natural form without giving a sense of incongruity.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front surface of the forearm decorative body 3352 is only when the second stage of the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage is performed. So that the forearm decorative body 3352 rotates clockwise so that the tip side of the forearm decorative body 3352 gets away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 so as to occupy the largest area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to the effect (FIG. 165 (e)), the backup display effect for attracting attention to the forearm decorative body 3352 is performed in order to boost this specific movable effect, so in the second stage, the first stage It will be more prominent than the third stage. Also, in the first stage advancement, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration on the back side of the back upper front decoration 3406 so that the area occupying the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 becomes smaller than the second stage. In a state where they are compactly folded so that the 3352 and the 3352 are hidden, and the light emission effect is not exhibited by a plurality of LEDs provided in the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 (a state where the LEDs are turned off And / or a plurality of LEDs are advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the plurality of LEDs are hidden by the back surface front decoration 3406). Even in the third stage, the area occupied by the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is smaller than the second stage, and the light emission effect of the plurality of LEDs provided in the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 is exhibited. I will not. However, the difference between the first stage advancement and the third stage advancement is the aspect of the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, while the display effect such that light is emitted from the upper front decoration 3406 is performed in the first stage advancing, the movable in the overlapping state from the standby position to the storage position in the third stage advancing The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is darkened or the like so that the player or the upper front decoration 3406 can not easily grasp the movement of the standby position.

  Thus, of the first stage, the second stage and the third stage, the third stage is the least visible. As a result, when the first stage advance is performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the specific movable effect being performed. However, a problem is how to bring the arm unit 3250, which has moved from the initial position to the standby position, back to the initial position without discomfort. The advance of the third stage is not a premise of the specific movable effect, and therefore the player proceeds when the arm unit 3250 such as the back upper front decoration 3406 is made to advance from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It may be misunderstood that there may still be big hit expectations. Therefore, by moving the arm unit 3250 from the initial position to the standby position or from the standby position to the initial position, the initial stage stands out in the order of the second stage, the first stage, and the third stage. A series of movable body effects such as movement from the position to the standby position and movement from the standby position to the initial position can be performed without discomfort.

  In the case where peripheral control MPU 4140a is determined not to move the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position by the main control MPU 4100a because the arm character product reach fluctuation pattern is not selected (in other words, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is in the appearance position The back up front movable rendering unit 3400 and the back up back movable rendering unit 3200 are also moved at a predetermined ratio even when it is not determined to move. More specifically, even if the arm character reach variation pattern is not selected in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (first fluctuation pattern setting processing, second fluctuation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4140a, the arm character Gasereach When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes fluctuation display and displays reach of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command instructing the fluctuation pattern, and then executes reach effect. Instead, the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 are moved from the storage position to the standby position immediately or after a predetermined number of normal reach effects are performed.

  In this case, however, peripheral control MPU 4140a derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the timing when the normal reach effect executed by liquid crystal display device 1900 is ended without moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are turned clockwise with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 are returned to the state of the accommodation position without moving the forearm decorative body 3352 in a visible state. In addition, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears) over a predetermined period. Turn off the lamp and LED arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and move the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise in a front view and move to the storage position Do. As a result, the rotating upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are made less noticeable. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is whited out over a predetermined period (in this case, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit with maximum white brightness). ) And the lamps and LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned on, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise as viewed from the front Move to position. As a result, the rotating upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are made less noticeable.

  As described above, even if the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is not visible, the liquid crystal display 1900 is displayed with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. The player is made to pay attention to the player by moving it from the storage position to the standby position by crossing the front and performing reach production with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 held in the standby position being conscious Expectations for the expression of the body 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 can be improved.

  In addition, since the timing for moving the back surface front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 to the standby position and the timing for moving the forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position are set, the variable display is ended. While being able to hold expectations for the movement of the back surface front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 to the standby position, the back front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and While the forearm decorative body 3352 is moving to the standby position, it can be expected to move to the appearance position of the forearm decorative body 3352 until the variable display is finished. In addition, as the period from the start of the variable display to the movement to the appearance position of the forearm decoration 3352 is longer (as the timing at which the forearm decoration 3352 moves to the appearance position is later), the jackpot expectation is higher In this case, when the forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position at an early stage by starting the variable display, the expectation for the big hit can be improved by the reach development effect being executed, Even if the forearm decoration 3352 does not move to the appearance position at an early stage, if the forearm decoration 3352 is subsequently moved to the appearance position, the player is discouraged by the jackpot expectation being further increased. Without being able to hold expectations for the subsequent movement to the appearance position of the forearm decorative body 3352 and improve expectations for the big hit

  In addition, the above-mentioned arm part product reach variation pattern may be determined only when it is a hit in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) executed by the main control MPU 4100a. The arm and character reach variation pattern may be determined at a predetermined rate that is lower than when it is hit. In addition, it may be determined to be the arm-cum-bodied article Gasereach variation pattern only when it is out of position in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) executed by the main control MPU 4100a. In the case of a hit, the arm character article Gasereach variation pattern may be determined at a predetermined rate lower than that in the case of a hit. As a result, when the entire forearm decorative body 3352 moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, the ratio of becoming a big hit, that is, the big hit expectation becomes high.

  Whether or not the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are pivoted in small increments in the standby position may be determined by lottery, and in this case, the arm character reaching variation pattern as a big hit and Upper arm decoration 3304 and forearm decoration 3352 at the standby position at the right and left at a higher rate than when arm character reach change patterns and arm character Gaseleech fluctuation patterns are received that shift when arm character Garse Reach fluctuation patterns are received. If it is decided to turn the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 little by little in the standby position by making small rotation, the big hit expectation may be made high, or the forearm decoration 3352 We received a fluctuation pattern command that indicates the arm character reach fluctuation pattern that moves the whole to the appearance position and makes it visible At the same time, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are squeezed from side to side in the standby position at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern command indicating the arm character product garse reach fluctuation pattern is not moved to the appearance position. The upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are expected to be moved to the appearance position when the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are slightly rotated to the left and right in the standby position. Expected execution of the production will be high, and consequently the jackpot expectation will be high.

  Further, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 may be made different depending on the degree of expectation of the big hit. For example, whether or not to control the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 and / or the light emission mode is determined by lottery, arm character reach fluctuation pattern and arm character Gaseech fluctuation A plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 are controlled to emit light at a higher rate than when the arm character reaching variation pattern and arm character reaching fluctuation pattern are received that shift when receiving a pattern It is possible to make the jackpot expectation higher when controlling the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 by determining the arm character reach fluctuation pattern that becomes the jackpot And arm character reach reach fluctuation putter which is deviated when it receives the character character Gasereach fluctuation pattern And when it is decided to a specific light emission aspect (flashing red) at a higher rate than when receiving the arm character article Gasereach fluctuation pattern, and receiving the arm character reach fluctuation pattern and arm character Gasereach fluctuation pattern, which are out of order Forearm decoration substrate 3353 and upper arms in a specific light emission mode by determining the normal light emission mode (flashing in blue) at a higher rate than when a jackpot arm character reach change pattern and an arm character Gaseleech fluctuation pattern are received. In the case where the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 3305 are controlled to emit light, the jackpot expectation may be increased.

  In addition, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 are differentiated according to the expectation for moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position, in other words, the execution expectation for reach development effect. You may do so. For example, whether or not to control the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 and / or the light emission mode is determined by lottery, and the entire forearm decorative body 3352 can be moved to the appearance position for visual recognition The forearm decoration base plate 3353 and the upper arm decoration base plate 3305 at a higher rate than when receiving the arm part product movement variation pattern which does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position when the arm character reach change pattern to be in state is received. It is expected to move the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position when controlling the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decoration substrate 3353 and the upper arm decoration substrate 3305 by deciding to control the light emission of a plurality of mounted LEDs. Degree may be increased, or the entire forearm decorative body 3352 may be moved to the appearance position to be visible. Determine the specific light emission mode (flashing red) at a higher rate than when receiving the arm character article Gasereach fluctuation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position when the arm character product reach fluctuation pattern is received, When receiving the arm character reach variation pattern that moves the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position and makes it visible when receiving the arm character Gaseliech fluctuation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position A forearm decoration when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decoration substrate 3353 and the upper arm decoration substrate 3305 in a specific light emission mode are determined by determining the normal light emission mode (flashing blue) at a higher rate than that The expectation for moving the entire 3352 to the appearance position may be high.

  Further, in the above example, when the normal reach effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is ended without moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Black out the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (after the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) have been determined and displayed) (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display is displayed In addition to turning off the lamp / LED disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 while turning off, the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in a front view. Is configured to move to the storage position, but until the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is finalized and displayed (normal reach effect The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be performed for a predetermined period of time) after the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the ending timing, or may be before the stop symbol of the offed symbol is displayed. Black out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off to make the display disappear), and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise as viewed from the front It may be configured to move to the storage position, and in this case, the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 within the period when the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out. The forearm decorative body 335 is rotated clockwise only for the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 without rotating the whole of the front view clockwise. When the whole is moved to the appearance position, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on and the lamp / LED disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, and then a big hit effect (so-called revival effect) or reach You may perform development presentation etc. This makes a big hit even after the player recognizes that the variable display has ended, and can give surprises and surprises, as well as having expectations for a big hit after the end of the variable display in the variable display executed thereafter. To improve the fun of the game.

  In the example described above, the reach development is performed based on moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position, but at least the forearm decoration is more than before moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position The present invention is not limited to the above as long as the effect display having a high hit probability is performed after the entire body 3352 is moved to the appearance position.

[9. Projector production]
Next, the projector effect performed during the variable display will be described. In this example, by executing the 15R big hit gaming state using the second opening and closing member 2553 as the big hit gaming state, the number of winning balls is the largest among the multiple types of big hit gaming states, and for the player after the big hit gaming state is over Give the most advantageous state for the player by controlling to the most advantageous high probability time state 15R (right) when winning a probability variation big hit If you win the projector unit 2150 from the variation display to the end of the big hit gaming state A predetermined image is projected to the player. Details will be described below.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the variable display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern indicating the 15R (right) probability variation big hit, derives and displays the jackpot symbol, and then displays the character. The character takes off clothes and performs an effect that shows the cherry blossoms falling on the character's shoulder. Further, the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light in synchronization with the operation of taking off the clothes of the character to project an image similar to the cherry blossom snowstorm drawn on the shoulders of the character on the shoulders of the player.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a big hit start command instructing start of the big hit gaming state from the main control MPU 4100 a, the projector unit 2150 is continuously lit to project an image similar to the cherry blossoms snowstorm on both shoulders of the player. Perform the production in the jackpot gaming state with. Then, the projector unit 2150 is turned off based on the reception of the big hit end command instructing the end of the big hit gaming state from the main control MPU 4100 a.

  In this way, when it is the most advantageous big hit for the player (in this example, 15R (right) positive variation big hit), the same image as cherry snowstorm is projected on both shoulders of the player during fluctuating display and during the big hit gaming state In order to continue projecting, while being able to improve game fun for the player on which the cherry blossoms snowflake is projected, it becomes the most advantageous big hit for the third party who is not playing with the game machine. Can appeal and give a sense of superiority. In addition, it can be made to recognize that cherry blossoms snowflake is projected when it becomes the most advantageous big hit to a third party who does not play a game with the gaming machine, and has expectation for projection of cherry blossoms snowflake by the projector unit 2150. It is possible to play a game.

  In addition, since an image similar to the cherry snowstorm drawn on the shoulders of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is projected on both shoulders of the player, it is possible to give an impression as to whether the player has become a character. By becoming a character and playing a game, the player can be entertained.

  In the above-described example, the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light to project an image similar to the cherry snowstorm drawn on the character's shoulder on both shoulders of the player, but at least a part of the player's body is the same as the character. An image similar to the character may be displayed by, for example, spraying a extinguishable ink to the player.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 are disposed below the center character 2500. When received in the first starting opening 2101 of the attacking unit 2100, a predetermined lottery result is drawn, and the predetermined region including the drawing result thus drawn and the two projection areas TR disposed in the vicinity where the player is seated A projector unit 2150 provided on the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 according to the detection of an object from the object detection means 2530 for detecting a player in the projector unit 2150 Right side decoration unit 200 for emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the glass plate 594 partitioning the front end of the game area 1100 at the same time as Left side framing unit 240, and causes lit off or reduced the emission decoration such as upper framing unit 280. The light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR is reflected to the game area 1100 in the projection area TR (part of the player's body), and then the game is performed with the transparent glass plate 594. It will be reflected to the patient side. At this time, the light emission decoration of each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 is turned off or reduced, and the light directly emitted to the player is reduced, and the inside of the game area 1100 is relatively dark. Therefore, the light (image) reflected to the player by the glass plate 594 of the door frame 5 after being projected from the projector unit 2150 to the light projection area TR and reflected by the light projection area TR becomes relatively strong. The image (light) reflected by the glass plate 594 from the player side becomes noticeable. The image reflected to the player side by the glass plate 594 is an image reflected by the glass plate 594 after being reflected by the light projection area TR as described above, and thus the light source when viewed from the player side A part of the player's body in the projection area TR illuminated by the projection of the image projected by the projector unit 2150 into the projection area TR and the image of the image projected on the glass plate 594 is not visible. Will be visible. Therefore, when the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, the projected image and a part of the player's body appear on the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 like a conventional pachinko machine It is possible to show the player an effect completely different from the effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900, the movable decorative body, etc., and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to perform the highly unexpected effect. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, as described above, when the projector unit 2150 emits light in accordance with the gaming state, a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR is reflected on the glass plate 594 and the projector unit 2150 is projected from the part The player looks at what is seen on the glass plate 594, and the player looks at the projection area TR (a part of his own body on which the image is projected), thinking "What is it?" Therefore, it becomes possible to notice the irradiation of light from the projector unit 2150. By recognizing the light emission of the projector unit 2150, it can be thought that something may be good, and a sense of expectation for the game It can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the image is projected from the projector unit 2150 to a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR, the image projected on the player is moved by the movement of the player on which the image is projected. Since the range changes, and the portion on which the image is projected is not flat but three-dimensional, when the player moves, the appearance of the projected image changes and the image can be expanded or contracted. Even a single image can be changed in various ways, and it is possible to enjoy the degree of reflection of the image projected to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to decrease the interest.

  Furthermore, an image is projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR, and a person other than the player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 1 (a different player or a pachinko machine) is projected by projecting a relatively pinpoint image. It is possible to make it difficult for the projector unit 2150 to notice the light emission of an employee of the game hall, etc. in which 1 is installed. That is, it is possible to make only the player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1 notice the effect using the projector unit 2150, and to enjoy the effect using the projector unit 2150 without being noticed by other players etc. Since it is possible, a chance (for example, a state in which the special winning opening 2103 can be accepted) after the end of the effect by the projector unit 2150 which emits light according to the lottery result selected by the game ball being received to the first starting opening 2101 etc. Even if the player does not arrive (in the case of the effect of losing), the other players are not aware of the effect, and the player can pose as calm, and even if it is the effect of losing, the player is It can be enjoyed without hesitation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the projection area TR is lower than the center in the vertical direction of the game area 1100, and when a player of a general height is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the head is lower than the head of the player. Becomes the projection area TR, and it is possible to suppress the light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 from reaching the player's eyes directly as much as possible, and the player emits light by the light emission of the projector unit 2150. It is possible to prevent dazzling from feeling, and to suppress discomfort due to dazzling to lower interest.

  Further, since the projector unit 2150 is provided in the attacker unit 2100 disposed below the center of the game area 1100, even if the projector unit 2150 is located at a position lower than the height of the player's eyes, It is possible to reduce as much as possible the light from the projector unit 2150 directly reaching the eyes of the player, and it is possible for the player to hardly notice. Therefore, by looking at the image projected to the projection area TR, the image reflected on the glass plate 594, etc., the player is made aware of the light-emitting effect by the projector unit 2150, and the impact at the start of the effect is obtained. Since it is possible to strengthen the game, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the light-emitting effect to attract the player's interest strongly, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the projector unit 2150 for projecting an image to the projection area TR according to the position of the player detected by the object detection means 2530 is made to emit light, the image (light) from the projector unit 2150 is surely specified area The projector unit 2150 can project images from the projector unit 2150 corresponding to the player's position (projection area TR) and the projector unit 2150. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lowered by further enhancing the effect.

  In addition, since the projector unit 2150 is disposed on the left and right sides of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, the projector unit 2150 can be made inconspicuous, and the light of the projector unit 2150 directly reaches the eyes of the player. When the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light, even if the light of the projector unit 2150 is directly viewed from the player, it is possible to suppress the illusion of being part of the light emission decoration of the attacker unit 2100 to the player. It is possible to prevent the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 from being noticed directly, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, since the object detection means 2530 is provided in the center product 2500 disposed substantially in the center of the game area 1100, it is disposed on the front side of the glass plate 594 (glass unit 590) including the projection area TR. A player (object) in a predetermined area (detection area) can be easily detected, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided which reliably detects an object in the predetermined area and reliably exerts the above-described effects. Further, since the object detection means 2530 is provided to the center character 2500, the object detection means 2530 can be attached to a desired position only by attaching the center character 2500 to the game panel 1200. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in assembly and to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, after inserting the frame-shaped center character 2500 into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, the back of the game panel 1200 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center character 2500. Since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed on the side, it is possible to allow the player side to fully view through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 and the frame of the center character 2500, and the projector unit 2150 In addition, effects using the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be performed, and various effects can be presented to the player to make it hard to get bored, and the player can be entertained by various effects, It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, by performing effects with the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a normal state, it is possible to enhance the premium feeling with respect to effects by the projector unit 2150, and it is possible to further enhance the impact of effects by the projector unit 2150. The expectation to the player can be further enhanced, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed behind the game panel 1200, and in the effect of the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the viewpoint of the player is positioned behind the game panel 1200, and the projector unit In the effect by the light emission of 2150, the viewpoint of the player can be positioned on the front side of the game panel 1200 (glass unit 590), so the player can change the device according to the device (projector unit 2150, liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.) used for the effect. The viewpoint can be changed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made hard to get tired by preventing the effect from becoming monotonous.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arm unit base 3251 for rotatably supporting (pivoting) the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are in the storage position and the storage position, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900 together with the upper arm unit 3300 and can not be viewed from the player. In this state, when the upper arm unit 3300 is rotationally moved from the storage position to the appearance position by the upper arm drive motor 3254 according to the game state, the tip end of the upper arm unit 3300 is lowered to the front side of the liquid crystal display 3300 together with the forearm unit 3350. When the forearm unit 3350 is further rotated by the forearm drive motor 3307 from the storage position to the deployed position, the leading end of the forearm unit 3350 is rotated in the direction away from the upper arm unit 3300. It is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the arm unit 3250 extends on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the forearm unit 3350 is rotationally moved from the storage position to the unfolded position by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the game state, the leading end side of the forearm unit 3350 will descend and appear on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, Furthermore, when the upper arm unit 3300 is rotationally moved from the storage position to the emerging position by the upper arm drive motor 3254, the upper arm unit 3300 descends and appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to push the forearm unit 3350. Therefore, it is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the upper arm unit 3300 and the entire forearm unit 3350 entirely change the form (shape) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, by the two upper arm units 3300 and the forearm units 3350 appearing on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with unusual motion so far. As a result, it is possible to surprise the player and to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be separately rotated and driven by the independent upper arm drive motor 3254 and the forearm drive motor 3307, the entire form of the arm unit 3250 can be changed variously. It is possible to make it hard to get tired of the movement (movable effect) of the arm unit 3250 by providing the arm unit 3250 capable of attracting attention of the player and capable of various movements, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a forearm unit 3350 that rotates around the tip end of the upper arm unit 3300 is further provided on the tip end side of the upper arm unit 3300 that rotates around the base end side. That is, since the arm unit 3250 is provided with the bifurcation, the entire arm unit 3250 can express the part of the arm of a living thing (including a predetermined character) such as a human or animal, and the player's interest As a result, it is possible to embody a movable effect capable of attracting more strongly, and to entertain the movement of the arm unit 3250.

  Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are rotationally moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the game state, and the arm unit 3250 blocks the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make the appearance (rotation) of the arm unit 3250 stand out, making it possible for the player to focus on the decoration unit, and for the player to enjoy the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 for entertaining The arm unit 3250 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play a game.

  In addition, upper arm unit 3300 and forearm unit 3350 are disposed above liquid crystal display device 1900, and upper arm unit 3300 is placed on the front side of liquid crystal display device 1900 to drive it (moving effect). And so on, so that the load on the upper arm drive motor 3254, the forearm drive motor 3307, etc. is reduced by being supported by the gravity acting on the upper arm unit 3300 or the forearm unit 3350. In addition to being able to do this, the arm unit 3250 can be made to appear speedily by making the turning speed faster, and the impact at the time of appearance can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Furthermore, a forearm drive motor 3307 for rotationally driving the forearm unit 3350 is disposed on the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300, and rotation from the forearm drive motor 3307 by the transmission rotating body 3311 and the link member 3312 is performed by the upper arm unit 3300. As compared with the case where the relatively heavy weight forearm drive motor 3307 is disposed on the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300, the rotation of the upper arm unit 3300 is performed. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the rotational moment (acting) acting on the moving shaft core, and it is possible to suppress an increase in load on the upper arm drive motor 3254. Therefore, since it is not necessary to enlarge the upper arm drive motor 3254 etc. in order to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 etc. strong, it is easy to secure a space for arranging the upper arm unit 3300 relatively, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with an arm unit 3250 that can stand out. In addition, since it is not necessary to use a component having high strength and rigidity for constituting the upper arm drive motor 3254 etc. to be strong, the cost for the upper arm drive motor 3254 etc. (pachinko machine 1) is increased. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the forearm unit 3350 is provided with the transmission pin 3351b eccentric from the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b, and then the transmission rotation body 3311 having the crankpin 3311b which is revolved by the forearm drive motor 3307; Since it has a hook-shaped link member 3312 for supporting the pin 3311 b and the transmission pin 3351 b in a connecting shaft, the hook-shaped link when the transmission rotation body 3311 is rotated by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the game state. As the crank pin 311b supported by the connecting shaft at the base end side of the member 3312 revolves, the transmission pin 3351b is pushed or pulled by the link member 3312 according to the direction of revolution of the crank pin 3311b, and the transmission pin 3351b It will revolve and the forearm unit 3350 can be turned securely. .

  In addition, the rotation of the transmission rotation body 3311 disposed on the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the second shaft portion 3301 b (forearm unit 3350) on the tip end side of the upper arm unit 3300 by the hook-shaped link member 3312. Since the long and thin link member 3312 is disposed in the upper arm unit 3300, the rotation from the forearm drive motor 3254 is set to the second as compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by a plurality of gears. The weight of the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting to the shaft portion 3301 b (second rotation shaft 3351 a) can be reduced, and an increase in load applied to the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the upper frame rain rain motor 3254 or the like large and durable, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  Further, in the upper arm unit 3300, a link axis line connecting the center of the crankpin 3311b to the center of the transmission pin 3351b with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotor 3311 (upper side) ), And the crankpin 3311 b revolves only between the position where the link axis slightly revolves to the other side (downward) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotation body 3311, and the transmission rotation body 3311 The forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position when it is at a position slightly revolvable to the one side with respect to the center of rotation, so the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, that is, the crankpin 3311b is slightly to the one side (upper side). In the state of the revolved position, the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 causes the link member 3312 to The direction of the force acting on the crank pin 3311 b acts in the direction of rotating the crank pin 3311 b further to one side (upward, counterclockwise direction in front view), but the crank pin 3311 b (transmission rotator 3311) Since the range of revolution is restricted by the slits 3311c so as not to revolve further to one side, the crank pin 3311b continues to stop at a position where it slightly revolves to one side without revolving. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotator 3311 does not rotate even if the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312 That is, since the transmission rotation body 3311 can be locked (blocked) from rotating naturally, it is possible that the rotational driving force by the rotation moment acts on the rotation shaft of the forearm drive motor 3307 via the transmission rotation body 3311. It can be avoided. Therefore, there is no need to keep driving the forearm drive motor 3307 in order to maintain the forearm unit 3250 in the storage position, and the load on the forearm drive motor 3307 is reduced and the forearm drive motor 3307 etc. is damaged prematurely. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the forearm driving motor 3307 etc. and to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by the interruption of the game. .

  Further, as described above, since the forearm unit 3350 can be maintained in the storage position without applying a load to the forearm drive motor 3307, it is necessary to use an expensive one equipped with a brake mechanism as the forearm drive motor 3307. Instead, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the forearm drive motor 3307 (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are provided with a plurality of LEDs (upper arm decorative substrate 3305 and forearm decorative substrate 3353) that can emit light according to the game state, and the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are liquid crystal display The upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs when the apparatus 1900 is rotated to the front side of the apparatus 1900. While being able to make it the arm unit 3250 which can attract the player's interest strongly, a player pays attention to the arm unit 3250, so that the movable effect and the light emission effect etc. by the arm unit 3250 are surely made. It can be entertained and you can control the player's interest from falling That.

  Also, the upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the translucent upper arm decorative body 3304 with three-dimensional decoration and the rear side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and supports the transmission rotating body 3311, the link member 3312 and the like on the front side A light transmitting upper arm base 3301 and an upper arm decoration substrate 3305 attached to the back side of the upper arm base 3301 and provided with a plurality of LEDs are provided, and light from the LED is transmitted through the upper arm decoration 3304 Since the irradiation is performed to the user side, the entire upper arm unit 3300 can be brightly decorated to make the shape, decoration, etc. of the upper arm decorative body 3304 more visible, and the decorative effect by the upper arm unit 3300 can be further enhanced. In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 can be highlighted to attract the player's attention.

  Also, the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 provided with a plurality of LEDs is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 supporting the upper arm decorative body 3304 from the rear side, and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 (LED) is mounted from the upper arm decorative body 3304 Since the light emitted from the LED toward the back side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 can be diffused as much as possible, the upper arm decorative body 3304 can be irradiated with the light as far as possible. The 3304 can be illuminated and decorated uniformly without spots. That is, since the upper arm unit 3300 can be beautifully illuminated and decorated, the appearance of the upper arm unit 3300 can be improved, the decorative effect by the upper arm unit 3300 can be enhanced, and the player's attention is strongly drawn. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Furthermore, since the link members 3312 and the like arranged on the front side of the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 have translucency, the light from the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 (LED) can be transmitted to the upper arm through the light transmitting portion. The decorative body 3304 can be favorably irradiated, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 can be beautifully luminously decorated.

  In addition to being provided with a frame-shaped center character 2500 in the game area 1100 and a liquid crystal display 1900 for displaying an effect image that can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center character 2500, the conventional pachinko machine is used. It becomes possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having an atmosphere similar to that of the machine, and it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to a player who is used to watching conventional pachinko machines, and this pachinko machine as a pachinko machine to be played The machine 1 can be made easy to select.

  The pachinko machine 1 described in the mode for carrying out the invention can be expressed as the following technical idea. In the following, the term described in the form for carrying out the invention described above is described in a broader sense, and the term “the term made in the generic concept” and the term described in the “form for carrying out the invention” In order to make correspondence with "," the above-mentioned "term described in the form for carrying out the invention" equivalent to "the term in the broader concept" is described in a parenthesis. However, once the above-mentioned "terms described in the form for carrying out the invention" corresponding to the "hyperconcepted terms" are described in parentheses once, they are omitted in the subsequent description in order to avoid duplicate descriptions. Have

  A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to the present technical concept performs a predetermined lottery process based on a receiving port that can receive gaming media driven into the gaming area and that the gaming media are received at the receiving port. Display control means capable of controlling the predetermined display effect to be displayed in the display area based on the result of the lottery process, display means having a display area in which a predetermined display effect is displayed, When the specific display mode indicating that the result of the lottery process is a specific result is displayed in the display area, a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and a forward of the display area Means for performing a specific movable effect capable of giving an expectation that the specific display mode is displayed in the display area, and the movable means disposed at a predetermined initial position, A predetermined standby position which is advanced from the initial position to the front of the display area but passes behind the front of the display area with the eyelid while concealing the front surface of the movable means The movable body passage control means for moving up to and the movable means moved to the predetermined standby position are further advanced to the front of the display area when the movable means is advanced from the predetermined initial position In order to change the visual impression, the exposed front face portion of the movable means is advanced and advanced to perform the specific movable effect, the movable body impact effect control means, and the specific movable effect is performed Sometimes, the apparatus is characterized by comprising movable body returning means for returning the movable means to the predetermined initial position at a predetermined timing after the specific movable effect is performed. .

  That is, when the game medium inserted into the game area 1100 is accepted by the receiving port (first start port 2101 and second start port 2102) and the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery process is performed. The display means (liquid crystal display device 1900) having a display area in which a predetermined display effect is performed based on the result of the lottery process (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is provided, and the result of the lottery process is In the case of a specific result (big hit), that is, when a specific display mode indicating a big hit is displayed in the display area, a big hit game advantageous to the player is executed. Further, by advancing to the front of the display area (display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900), an expectation that the specific display mode is displayed in the display area (that is, an image indicating that it is a big hit is displayed) The movable means (upper front decoration 3406, upper arm decoration 3304 and forearm decoration 3352) on which specific movable effects that can be given (i.e., the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (e) and 219) are performed is provided. The movable means is always disposed at the initial position, and is movable based on the result of the lottery process. Specifically, as the first step, the movable means disposed at the predetermined initial position is advanced when advancing from the predetermined initial position to the front of the display area, but movable when advancing the front of the display area The pattern attached to the front of the means is concealed by a predetermined concealing member (upper front decoration 3406) so that it can not be seen from the front. Then, the movable means whose front surface is not seen from the front by the concealing member in this way passes the eyelid and the front of the display area as compared with the second stage described later, and is a predetermined initial position It is moved to a different predetermined standby position (movable-body-passage control means). However, even if the movable means moves from the predetermined initial position to the predetermined standby position, the specific movable effect is not necessarily performed. Then, when the specific movable effect is performed, the visual impression is changed as compared with the case where the movable means moved to the predetermined standby position is advanced to the front of the display area from the predetermined initial position in the first stage, While the concealing member is left at the standby position, it is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to perform a specific movable effect (movable object impact effect control means). By changing the visual impression, the movable means is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display 1900 while leaving the concealing member in the standby position, so that the pattern attached to the front of the movable means can be seen from the front. It is equivalent to being able to visually recognize the light emission states of the plurality of LEDs disposed on the front surface of the movable means. Also, as compared with the case of advancing to the front of the display area from the predetermined initial position in the first stage, the shape on the appearance also changes, so the size occupying the display area in front of the display area The size of the area that impedes the display effect changes, and the visual impression seen from the front changes. When the visual impression of the player is changed in this manner, the impact on the player is increased, and the player can be made to pay attention to the movable means. Here, in particular, when the specific movable effect is performed, the concealing member for concealing the movable means remains moved to the standby position, so as a third step, concealing from the standby position in a very natural form It becomes an issue whether the member is advanced to the front of the display area and returned to the initial position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the concealing member is subjected to the first and second steps at a predetermined timing after the specific movable effect is performed (in the present embodiment, a timing immediately before the current variable display is displayed). As compared with the case where the movable means is advanced to the front of the display area, the eyelid and the movable means are returned unnoticeably from the standby position to the initial position in a natural shape (movable body return means). Thus, advancing of the movable means from the initial position in the first stage to the front of the display area, advancing of the movable means from the standby position in the second stage to the front of the display area, and forward of the display area from the standby position in the third stage By suitably performing the series of movable means movements such as advancing of the movable means, it is possible to reduce an excessive expectation on the player and an excessive discouragement of the player. That is, as a step before the specific movable effect, although the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in the initial position are temporarily advanced to the front of the display area, the specific movable effect is performed here By performing an effect such as passing the front of the display area and moving to the standby position, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific movable effect and thus the big hit expectation. In addition, even if the frequency of the effect in the previous stage of such specific movable effect is increased, since the big hit expectation for this specific movable effect can be maintained unless the execution frequency of the specific movable effect is increased, It is possible to reduce excessive expectations and discourage players from being overly disappointed.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 100 Door frame base unit 200 Right side decoration unit (outside decoration unit)
204 Side upper decoration member (decoration member)
214 Right side top decoration board (decoration board)
214a LED
214b LED
214c LED
216 Right side bottom decoration board (decoration board)
216a LED
216b LED
240 Left side decoration unit (outside decoration unit)
244 Side upper decoration member (decoration member)
254 Decorative board on left side (decorative board)
254a LED
254b LED
256 Left side lower decoration board (decoration board)
256a LED
256b LED
280 Upper decoration unit (outer decoration unit)
281 Front decoration member (decoration member)
286 Upper decorative board (decorative board)
286a LED
286b LED
288 Bottom surface decoration member (decoration member)
1100 game area 1110 front component 1200 game panel 1210 panel board 1215 opening 1220 panel holder 1900 liquid crystal display device 1901a-1901d first hold display area 1902a-1902d second hold display area 2000 table unit 2100 attacker unit (inlet unit)
2101 1st starting port (inlet)
2102 Second starting port (Inlet, variable inlet)
2103 Special winning opening (reception, variable reception)
2104 General prize winning opening (reception)
2105 Movable piece 2106 Opening / closing member 2121 Start opening solenoid 2124 Attacher solenoid 2150 Projector unit (projector)
2150R right projector unit 2150L left projector unit 2152 projector main body 2156 light source unit 2157 lens group 2158 image film 2500 center character 2501 window unit 2502 flange unit 2503 peripheral unit 2504 warp inlet 2505 warp outlet 2510 warp outlet 2510 stage 2514 chance inlet 2515 chance outlet 2530 object detection Means 2531 Upper object sensor 2532 Left object sensor 2533 Right object sensor 2534 Lower object sensor 2550 Second attacker unit 2552 Second large winning opening TR Projection area (specific area)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a gaming board on which a game ball can flow down on the front side, and an entrance unit provided on the gaming board and having a winning opening on which the game ball can enter,
The winning opening is opened and closed by an open / close member that switches between an open state and a closed state,
A cover unit is provided on the front side of the ball entry unit to form a game area as a back area,
A distribution guide means for guiding the distribution of the gaming balls is provided on the side of the cover surface of the cover unit separately from the opening and closing member ,
The distribution guide means includes a branch portion provided as a non-movable fixed member for branching the flow path of the game ball and having a slant surface for rolling the game ball toward the winning opening, and the branch portion The game ball is branched into a first flow path that can be distributed to the winning opening and a second flow path that is not distributed to the winning opening ,
No game nail is provided on the surface side of the cover portion , and the cover portion and the distribution guide means are in contact with the game balls to guide the distribution of the game balls,
The branching unit is provided on the upstream side of the branching unit, and branches the gaming ball which has flowed down the ball flow passage having a width in which only one game ball can flow down to the first flow passage or the second flow passage. A game machine characterized by being capable of .